Download
Share
Print this page
Yealink SIP-T54S Administrator's Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Yealink Manuals
  4. IP Phone
  5. SIP-T54S
  6. Administrator's manual

Yealink SIP-T54S Administrator's Manual

Sip-t2 series; sip-t4 series; sip-t5 series
Hide thumbs Also See for SIP-T54S:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Table Of Contents
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990

Advertisement

Quick Links

See also: User Manual , Manual
63

Advertisement

loading
Need help?

Need help?

Do you have a question about the SIP-T54S and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Subscribe to Our Youtube Channel

Related Manuals for Yealink SIP-T54S

Summary of Contents for Yealink SIP-T54S

  • Page 2 Yealink and/or its respective suppliers are not responsible for the suitability of the information contained in this document for any reason. The information is provided “as is”, and Yealink does not provide any warranty and is subject to change without notice. All risks other than risks caused by use of the...

  • Page 3: End User License Agreement

    The EULA for this product is available on the Yealink Support page for the product.

  • Page 4: Gnu Gpl Information

    GPL. Please refer to the GPL for the exact terms and conditions of the license. The original GPL license, source code of components licensed under GPL and used in Yealink products can be downloaded from Yealink web site: http://www.yealink.com/GPLOpenSource.aspx?BaseInfoCateId=293&NewsCateId=293&CateId=293.

  • Page 5: About This Guide

    Introduction About This Guide Yealink administrator guide is intended for administrators who need to properly configure, customize, manage, and troubleshoot the IP phone system rather than end-users. This guide will help you understand the Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) components, and provides descriptions of all available phone features.
  • Page 6 Description of Configuration Parameters in CFG Files, which describes all configuration  parameters in configuration files. Note that Yealink administrator guide contains most of parameters. If you want to find out Description of Configuration more parameters which are not listed in this guide, please refer to Parameters in CFG Files guide.
  • Page 7 Introduction Conventions Used in Yealink Documentations Yealink documentations contain a few typographic conventions and writing conventions. You need to know the following basic typographic conventions to distinguish types of in-text information: Convention Description Highlights the web/phone user interface items such as menus, menu selections, soft keys, or directory names when they are involved in a procedure or user action (e.g., Click on...
  • Page 8 The central provisioning method requires you to configure parameters located in CFG format configuration files that Yealink provides. For more information on configuration files, refer to Configuration Files on page 138.
  • Page 9 Introduction Configuration Parameter Table Format The following configuration parameter table describes the parameter that you can configure to make the feature (e.g., auto answer) work. Sometimes you will see the words “Refer to the following content” in the Permitted Values or Note Default field.
  • Page 10 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones locate the specific parameter in the CFG file. For example, if you want to enable the auto answer feature for account 1, you need to locate account.1.auto_answer in the MAC.cfg file and then configure it as required (e.g., account.1.auto_answer = 1).
  • Page 11 For more information on configuring and administering other Yealink products not included in this guide, refer to product support page at Yealink Technical Support. To access the latest Release Notes or other guides for Yealink IP phones, refer to the Document Download page for your phone at Yealink Technical Support.

  • Page 12: Voip Principle

    This guide mainly takes the SIP-T46G IP phones as example for reference. For more details on Yealink phone-specific user guide other IP phones, refer to For other references, look for the hyperlink or web info throughout this administrator guide.

  • Page 13: Sip Components

    Introduction SIP provides capabilities to: Determine the location of the target endpoint -- SIP supports address resolution, name  mapping, and call redirection. Determine media capabilities of the target endpoint -- Via Session Description Protocol  (SDP), SIP determines the “lowest level” of common services between endpoints. Conferences are established using only media capabilities that can be supported by all endpoints.
  • Page 14 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones to use content types of other applications other than the one you are trying to let through what has been denied. User Agent Server (UAS) UAS is a server that hosts the application responsible for receiving the SIP requests from a UAC, and on reception it returns a response to the request back to the UAC.
  • Page 15 1043  Changes for Release 81, Guide Version 81.71 Documentations of the newly released SIP-T54S/T52S, CP860 IP phones and EXP50 color- screen expansion modules have been added. The following sections are new for this version: Connecting the Optional Expansion PSTN Box CPN10 (Only Applicable to CP860/CP920 IP ...
  • Page 16 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Auto Answer on page  Do Not Disturb (DND) on page  Call Forward on page  Call Park on page  Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) on page  Visual Alert and Audio Alert for BLF Pickup on page ...
  • Page 17 Introduction Customizing Softkey Layout Template File on page  Dial Plan using Digit Map String Rules on page  Call Number Filter on page  Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP) on page  Intercom on page  Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) on page ...

  • Page 18: Table Of Contents

    Getting Started ................21 What IP Phones Need to Meet ............................21 Yealink IP Phones in a Network ............................21 Connecting the IP Phones ..............................22 Attaching the Stand and the Optional Wall Mount Bracket (not Applicable to CP860/CP920 IP phones) ....................................

  • Page 19: Table Of Contents

    Table of Contents Connecting the Optional USB Flash Drive (Only Applicable to SIP- T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T42S/T41S/T29G/T27G/CP860/CP920 IP phones)....36 Connecting the Optional Expansion Microphones (Only Applicable to CP860 IP Phones) ... 38 Connecting the Optional PC or Mobile Device (only applicable to CP860 IP phones) ....38 Connecting the Optional Expansion PSTN Box CPN10 (Only Applicable to CP860/CP920 IP Phones) ....................................

  • Page 20: Table Of Contents

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Page Switch Key ..................................213 Enable Page Tips ................................... 214 Page Tips for Expansion Module ............................ 216 Label Length .................................... 218 Linekey Length in Short ..............................221 Account Registration ................................223 SIP Account ..................................

  • Page 21: Table Of Contents

    Table of Contents Local Directory ..................................350 Customizing a Local Contact File .......................... 350 Configuring Local Directory ............................ 363 Backing up the Local Contacts ..........................367 Live Dialpad ..................................... 369 Speed Dial ....................................371 Call Waiting ..................................... 379 Auto Redial ....................................383 Auto Answer ....................................

  • Page 22: Table Of Contents

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Keep Mute ..................................542 Intercom ....................................543 Outgoing Intercom Calls ............................543 Incoming Intercom Calls ............................554 Call Timeout .................................... 557 Ringing Timeout ..................................558 Send user=phone ................................. 559 SIP Send MAC ..................................561 SIP Send Line...................................

  • Page 23: Table Of Contents

    Table of Contents Logon Wizard ..................................716 Action URL ....................................720 Action URI ....................................739 Configuring Trusted IP Address for Action URI ....................744 Scenario A - Capturing the Current Screen of the Phone ................747 Scenario B - Placing a Call via Web User Interface ..................748 Server Redundancy................................

  • Page 24: Table Of Contents

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Jitter Buffer ..................................884 Noise Suppression............................... 888 Smart Noise Block ............................... 889 DTMF ......................................890 Methods of Transmitting DTMF Digit ......................... 891 Suppress DTMF Display ............................897 Transfer via DTMF ................................ 898 DTMF Send Event Flash .............................

  • Page 25: Table Of Contents

    Table of Contents System Log Issues ............................... 994 Resetting Issues ................................995 Rebooting Issues ................................998 Protocols and Ports Issues ............................ 1001 Password Issues ................................. 1004 Logo Issues .................................. 1004 Power and Startup Issues ............................1004 Other Issues ................................1005 Appendix...................
  • Page 26 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones xxvi...

  • Page 27: Product Overview

    3261), and they can only be used within a network that supports this model of phone. For a list of key features available on Yealink IP phones running the latest firmware, refer to Features of IP Phones on page 15.
  • Page 28 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones SIP-T54S Physical Features: 4.3” 480 x 272 pixel color display with backlight ® 16 VoIP accounts, Broadsoft Validated/Asterisk Compatible HD Voice: HD Codec, HD Handset, HD Speaker 36 dedicated hard keys and 4 context-sensitive soft keys...
  • Page 29 Product Overview SIP-T52S Physical Features: 2.8” 320 x 240 pixel color display with backlight 12 VoIP accounts, Broadsoft Validated/Asterisk ® Compatible HD Voice: HD Codec, HD Handset, HD Speaker 32 dedicated hard keys and 4 context-sensitive soft keys 1*RJ9 (4P4C) handset port 1*RJ9 (4P4C) headset port 2*RJ45 10/100/1000Mbps Ethernet ports 11 LEDs: 1*power, 8*line, 1*mute, 1*headset...
  • Page 30 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones SIP-T48G/S Physical Features: 7” 800 x 480 pixel color touch screen with backlight 24 bit depth color 16 VoIP accounts, Broadsoft Validated/Asterisk® Compatible HD Voice: HD Codec, HD Handset, HD Speaker 26 dedicated hard keys 1*RJ9 (4P4C) handset port 1*RJ9 (4P4C) headset port...
  • Page 31 Product Overview SIP-T46G/S Physical Features: 4.3” 480 x 272 pixel color display with backlight 24 bit depth color 16 VoIP accounts, Broadsoft Validated/Asterisk® Compatible HD Voice: HD Codec, HD Handset, HD Speaker 36 dedicated hard keys and 4 context-sensitive soft keys 1*RJ9 (4P4C) handset port 1*RJ9 (4P4C) headset port 2*RJ45 10/100/1000Mbps Ethernet ports...
  • Page 32 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones SIP-T42G/S Physical Features: 192 x 64 graphic LCD 12 VoIP accounts, Broadsoft Validated/Asterisk® Compatible HD Voice: HD Codec, HD Handset, HD Speaker 30 dedicated hard keys and 4 context-sensitive soft keys 1*RJ9 (4P4C) handset port 1*RJ9 (4P4C) headset port 2*RJ45 10/100/1000Mbps Ethernet ports...
  • Page 33 Product Overview SIP-T41P/S Physical Features: 192 x 64 graphic LCD 6 VoIP accounts, Broadsoft Validated/Asterisk® Compatible HD Voice: HD Codec, HD Handset, HD Speaker 30 dedicated hard keys and 4 context-sensitive soft keys 1*RJ9 (4P4C) handset port 1*RJ9 (4P4C) headset port 2*RJ45 10/100Mbps Ethernet ports 1*RJ12 (6P6C) EHS36 headset adapter port 10 LEDs: 1*power, 6*line, 1*mute, 1*headset, 1*speakerphone...
  • Page 34 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones SIP-T40P/G Physical Features: 132 x 64 graphic LCD 3 VoIP accounts, Broadsoft Validated/Asterisk® Compatible HD Voice: HD Codec, HD Handset, HD Speaker 27 dedicated hard keys and 4 context-sensitive soft keys 1*RJ9 (4P4C) handset port 1*RJ9 (4P4C) headset port 2*RJ45 10/100/1000Mbps Ethernet ports (1000Mbps is only applicable to SIP-T40G IP...
  • Page 35 Product Overview SIP-T29G Physical Features: 4.3” 480 x 272 pixel color display with backlight 24 bit depth color 16 VoIP accounts, Broadsoft Validated/Asterisk® Compatible HD Voice: HD Codec, HD Handset, HD Speaker 37 dedicated hard keys and 4 context-sensitive soft keys 1*RJ9 (4P4C) handset port 1*RJ9 (4P4C) headset port 2*RJ45 10/100/1000Mbps Ethernet ports...
  • Page 36 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones SIP-T27P/G Physical Features: 240 x 120 graphic LCD 6 VoIP accounts, Broadsoft Validated/Asterisk® Compatible HD Voice: HD Codec, HD Handset, HD Speaker 35 dedicated hard keys and 4 context-sensitive soft keys 1*RJ9 (4P4C) handset port 1*RJ9 (4P4C) headset port 2*RJ45 10/100/1000Mbps Ethernet ports (1000Mbps is only applicable to SIP-T27G IP...
  • Page 37 Product Overview SIP-T23P/G Physical Features: 132 x 64 graphic LCD with 4-level grayscales 3 VoIP accounts, Broadsoft Validated/Asterisk® Compatible HD Voice: HD Codec, HD Handset, HD Speaker 27 dedicated hard keys and 4 context-sensitive soft keys 1*RJ9 (4P4C) handset port 1*RJ9 (4P4C) headset port 2*RJ45 10/100/1000Mbps Ethernet ports (1000Mbps is only applicable to SIP-T23G IP phones)
  • Page 38 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones SIP-T21(P) E2 Physical Features: 132 x 64 graphic LCD 2 VoIP accounts, Broadsoft Validated/Asterisk® Compatible 26 dedicated hard keys and 4 context-sensitive soft keys 4 LEDs: 1*power, 2*line, 1*message HD Voice: HD Codec, HD Handset, HD Speaker 1*RJ9 (4P4C) handset port 1*RJ9 (4P4C) headset port 2*RJ45 10/100Mbps Ethernet ports...
  • Page 39 Product Overview SIP-T19(P) E2 Physical Features: 132 x 64 graphic LCD Single VoIP account, Broadsoft Validated/Asterisk® Compatible 24 dedicated hard keys and 4 context-sensitive soft keys 1 LED: 1*power HD Voice: HD Codec, HD Handset 1*RJ9 (4P4C) handset port 1*RJ9 (4P4C) headset port 2*RJ45 10/100Mbps Ethernet ports Power adapter: AC 100~240V input and DC 5V/600mA output Power over Ethernet (IEEE 802.3af) (not applicable to SIP-T19 E2 IP phones)
  • Page 40 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones CP860 Physical Features: 192 x 64 graphic LCD One VoIP account/Yealink Cloud account and two PSTN accounts 20 dedicated hard keys and 4 context-sensitive soft keys HD Voice: HD Codec 1 mobile phone/PC port: 3.5mm...

  • Page 41: Key Features Of Ip Phones

    Product Overview CP920 Physical Features: 248 x 120 graphic LCD One VoIP account/Yealink Cloud account and two PSTN accounts 23 dedicated hard keys and 4 context-sensitive soft keys HD Voice: HD Codec 1*RJ45 10/100Mbps Ethernet port 1*USB2.0 port Security lock port...
  • Page 42 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones to CP860 and CP920 IP phones). Basic Features: DND, auto redial, live dialpad, dial plan, hotline, caller identity, auto answer. Advanced Features: BLF, server redundancy, distinctive ring tones, remote phone book, LDAP.

  • Page 43: Expansion Modules

    This section introduces EXP20, EXP40 and EXP50 expansion modules. The expansion modules are consoles you can connect to Yealink IP phones to add DSS keys, which can be used to assign predefined functionalities for quickly accessing features. If you want to configure the expansion module keys, you have to connect the expansion module(s) to the IP phone in advance.
  • Page 44 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones EXP20 Physical Features: Rich visual experience with 160 x 320 graphic LCD 20 physical keys each with a dual-color LED 20 additional keys through page switch Daisy-chain 6 modules up to 120 physical keys Expansion module (≤2) is powered by the host phone 2*RJ-12 (6P6C) ports for data in and out...
  • Page 45 Product Overview EXP40 Physical Features: Rich visual experience with 160 x 320 graphic LCD 20 physical keys each with a dual-color LED 20 additional keys through page switch Support up to 6 modules daisy-chain Expansion module (≤2) is powered by the host phone 2*RJ-12 (6P6C) ports for data in and out Wall Mount EXP50...
  • Page 46 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Physical Features: Rich visual experience with 480 x 272 color display 20 physical keys each with a dual-color LED 40 additional keys through page switch Support up to 3 modules daisy-chain Only one expansion module is powered by the host phone 1*Mini USB port and 1*USB2.0 port for data in and out Wall Mount...

  • Page 47: Getting Started

    Since the IP phone is a data terminal, digitized audio being just another type of data from its perspective, the phone is capable of vastly more than traditional business phones. Moreover, Yealink IP phones run the same protocols as your office personal computer, which means that many innovative applications can be developed without resorting to specialized technology.

  • Page 48: Connecting The Ip Phones

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones There are many ways to set up a phone network using Yealink IP phones. The following shows an example of a network setup: Connecting the IP Phones This section introduces how to install SIP- T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S/T40P/T40G/T29G/T27P/T27G/T23P/T 23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860/CP920 IP phones with components in packaging contents.
  • Page 49 The optional accessories are not included in packaging contents. You need to purchase them Note separately if required. Attaching the Stand and the Optional Wall Mount Bracket (not Applicable to CP860/CP920 IP phones) To attach the stand and the optional wall mount bracket: For SIP-T54S/T52S: Desk Mount Method Wall Mount Method (Optional)
  • Page 50 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones For SIP-T48G/S: Desk Mount Method Wall Mount Method (Optional) Note The top two slots on SIP-T48G/S IP phones are plugged up by silica gel. You need to pull out silica gel before attaching the wall mount bracket.
  • Page 51 Getting Started For SIP-T46G/S: Desk Mount Method Wall Mount Method (Optional)
  • Page 52 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones For SIP-T42G/T41P/T40P/T40G: Desk Mount Method Wall Mount Method (Optional)
  • Page 53 Getting Started For SIP-T42S/T41S: Desk Mount Method Wall Mount Method (Optional)
  • Page 54 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones For SIP-T29G/T27P/T27G: Desk Mount Method Wall Mount Method (Optional)
  • Page 55 Getting Started For SIP-T23P/T23G: Desk Mount Method Wall Mount Method (Optional)
  • Page 56 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones For SIP-T21(P) E2: Desk Mount Method Wall Mount Method (Optional)

  • Page 57: Connecting The Handset And Optional Headset (Not Applicable To Cp860/Cp920 Ip Phones)

    Yealink Wall Mount For more information on how to mount the IP phone to a wall, refer to Quick Installation Guide for Yealink IP Phones Connecting the Handset and Optional Headset (not Applicable to CP860/CP920 IP phones) To connect the handset and optional headset:...
  • Page 58 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones For SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G: For SIP-T42G/T41P/T40P/T40G: For SIP-T42S/T41S: For SIP-T27P:...

  • Page 59: Connecting The Power And Network

    The EXT port on SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S IP phones can also be used to connect the expansion module EXP40. The EXT port on SIP-T29G/T27P/T27G IP phones can also be used to connect the expansion module EXP20. For more information on how to connect the Yealink EXP-specific user guide EXP40/EXP20, refer to For SIP-T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2:...
  • Page 60 For CP860: For CP920: Note The IP phone should be used with Yealink original power adapter only. The use of the third- party power adapter may cause the damage to the phone. You can also connect the SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T42S/T41S/T29G/T27G/CP920 IP phone to a wireless network according to your office environment. For more information,...
  • Page 61 Getting Started Power over Ethernet (PoE) With the included or a regular Ethernet cable, IP phones can be powered from a PoE-compliant switch or hub. Note PoE is not applicable to the SIP-T21 E2 and SIP-T19 E2 IP phones. To connect the PoE: Connect the Ethernet cable between the Internet port on the IP phone and an available port on the in-line power switch/hub.
  • Page 62 T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T42S/T41S/T29G/T27G/CP 860/CP920 IP phones) You can connect a USB flash drive to record and play back calls. For SIP-T54S/T52S IP phones, you can also connect a USB flash drive to display pictures on your phone and set a picture stored in the USB flash drive as the wallpaper/screensaver.
  • Page 63 Bluetooth USB dongle BT40 can only be used on the SIP- T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T42S/T41S/T29G/T27G IP phones. For more information on how to use Yealink Bluetooth USB Dongle BT40 User Guide the BT40, refer to Wi-Fi USB dongle WF40 can only be used on the SIP- T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T42S/T41S/T46G/T46S/T29G/T27G IP phones.

  • Page 64: Connecting The Optional Expansion Microphones (Only Applicable To Cp860 Ip Phones)

    Connecting the Optional Expansion Microphones (Only Applicable to CP860 IP Phones) You can connect optional expansion microphones to enhance the room coverage of the conference phone. The Yealink-provided expansion microphone kit contains two expansion microphones. To connect the expansion microphones: Connect the free end of the optional expansion microphone cable to one of the MIC ports on the phone.
  • Page 65 Getting Started To connect a PC or mobile device: Connect one end of the 3.5mm jack cable to the PC/mobile port on the phone, and connect the other end to the headset jack on the mobile device or the AUX/MIC jack on the PC.
  • Page 66 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones To connect the expansion PSTN box: For CP860： Insert the USB plug on the expansion PSTN box into the USB port on the phone. A PSTN box: Two PSTN boxes: For CP920：...

  • Page 67: Initialization Process Overview

    Note the USB port on the PSTN box. For more information on how to use PSTN box CPN10, refer to Yealink PSTN Box CPN10 Quick Start Guide Initialization Process Overview The initialization process of the IP phone is responsible for network connectivity and operation of the IP phone in your local network.

  • Page 68: Verifying Startup

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Secondary DNS  You need to configure network parameters of the IP phone manually if any of them is not supplied by the DHCP server. For more information on configuring network parameters manually, refer to Configuring Network Parameters Manually on page 56.
  • Page 69 Getting Started If you are using CP860 IP phones, and the phones are first powered on or the phone settings are reset to factory defaults, the setup wizard will appear on the LCD screen after startup. If not, go to the next step. Note Yealink_CP860_User_Guide For more information on the setup wizard, refer to...
  • Page 70 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones...

  • Page 71: Setting Up Your System

     Setting Up Your Phone Network Yealink IP phones operate on an Ethernet local area network (LAN) or wireless network. Local area network design varies by organization and Yealink IP phones can be configured to accommodate a number of network designs.

  • Page 72: Dhcp

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones DHCP DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is a network protocol used to dynamically allocate network parameters to network hosts. The automatic allocation of network parameters to hosts eases the administrative burden of maintaining an IP network. IP phones comply with the DHCP specifications documented in 2131.
  • Page 73 Setting Up Your System To configure DHCP via web user interface: Click on Network->Basic. In the IPv4 Config block, mark the DHCP radio box. Click Confirm to accept the change. A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot. Click OK to reboot the phone.
  • Page 74 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones ork&q=load Configure the static DNS feature. Phone User Interface Configure static DNS address. Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default static.network.static_dns_enable 0 or 1 Description: Triggers the static DNS feature to on or off. 0-Off 1-On If it is set to 0 (Off), the IP phone will use the IPv4 DNS obtained from DHCP.
  • Page 75 Setting Up Your System Parameters Permitted Values Default static.network.secondary_dns IPv4 Address Blank Description: Configures the secondary IPv4 DNS server. Example: static.network.secondary_dns = 202.101.103.54 Note: It works only if the value of the parameter "static.network.static_dns_enable" is set to 1 (On). If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect.

  • Page 76: Dhcp Option

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Press , or the Switch soft key to select the Enabled from the Static DNS field. Enter the desired value in the Pri.DNS and Sec.DNS field respectively. Press the Save soft key to accept the change. A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot.
  • Page 77 DHCP Option 66 and Option 43 Yealink IP phones support obtaining the provisioning server and Auto Configuration Server (ACS) address by detecting DHCP options during startup. During the startup, the phone will automatically detect the option 66 and option 43. DHCP option 66 is used to identify the TFTP server.
  • Page 78 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameter Permitted Values Default 1-On If it is set to 1 (On), the IP phone will obtain the provisioning server address by detecting DHCP options. Web User Interface: Settings->Auto Provision->DHCP Active Phone User Interface: None static.auto_provision.dhcp_option.list_user_...
  • Page 79 Click Confirm to accept the change. DHCP Option 42 and Option 2 Yealink IP phones support using the NTP server address offered by DHCP. DHCP option 42 is used to specify a list of NTP servers available to the client by IP address. NTP servers should be listed in order of preference.
  • Page 80 Description: Configures the DHCP option 12 hostname on the IP phone. For SIP-T54S IP phones: The default value is SIP-T54S. For SIP-T52S IP phones: The default value is SIP-T52S. For SIP-T48G IP phones: The default value is SIP-T48G.
  • Page 81 Setting Up Your System Parameter Permitted Values Default For SIP-T23P IP phones: The default value is SIP-T23P. For SIP-T23G IP phones: The default value is SIP-T23G. For SIP-T21P E2 IP phones: The default value is SIP-T21P_E2. For SIP-T21 E2 IP phones: The default value is SIP-T21_E2.

  • Page 82: Configuring Network Parameters Manually

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Enter the desired host name in the DHCP Hostname field. Click Confirm to accept the change. A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot. Click OK to reboot the phone.
  • Page 83 Setting Up Your System static.network.primary_dns static.network.secondary_dns Configure network parameters of the IP phone manually. Web User Interface Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=network& q=load Configure network parameters of the IP phone Phone User Interface manually. Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default static.network.internet_port.type 0 or 2 Description:...
  • Page 84 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Menu->Advanced (default password: admin) ->Network->WAN Port->IP Mode static.network.internet_port.ip IPv4 Address Blank Description: Configures the IPv4 address. Example: static.network.internet_port.ip = 192.168.1.20 Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “static.network.ip_address_mode” is set to 0 (IPv4) or 2 (IPv4 &...
  • Page 85 Setting Up Your System Parameters Permitted Values Default static.network.internet_port.gateway = 192.168.1.254 Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “static.network.ip_address_mode” is set to 0 (IPv4) or 2 (IPv4 & IPv6), and “static.network.internet_port.type” is set to 2 (Static IP Address).
  • Page 86 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: Menu->Advanced (default password: admin) ->Network->WAN Port->IPv4->Type (Static IP)->Sec.DNS To configure the IP address mode via web user interface: Click on Network->Basic. Select desired value from the pull-down list of Mode(IPv4/IPv6). Click Confirm to accept the change.

  • Page 87: Configuring Transmission Methods Of The Internet Port And Pc Port

    Click OK to reboot the phone. Configuring Transmission Methods of the Internet Port and PC Port Yealink SIP- T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S/T40P/T40G/T29G/T27P/T27G/T23P/T 23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2 IP phones support two Ethernet ports: Internet port and PC port. The CP860/CP920 IP phones have Internet port only. You can enable or disable the PC port on the IP phones.
  • Page 88 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Half-duplex Half-duplex transmission refers to transmitting voice or data in both directions, but in one direction at a time; this means one device can send data on the line, but not receive data simultaneously.
  • Page 89 5-Full Duplex 1000Mbps (only applicable to SIP- T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T42G/T42S/T40G/T29G/T27G/T23G IP phones) Note: For SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T42G/T42S/T40G/T29G/T27G/T23G IP phones, you can set the transmission speed to 1000Mbps/Auto Negotiation to transmit in 1000Mbps if the IP phone is connected to the switch supports Gigabit Ethernet. We recommend that you do not change this parameter.
  • Page 90 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default 5-Full Duplex 1000Mbps (only applicable to SIP- T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T42G/T42S/T40G/T29G/T27G/T23G IP phones) Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “static.network.pc_port.enable” is set to 1 (Auto Negotiation). It is not applicable to CP860/CP920 IP phones. For SIP- T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T42G/T42S/T40G/T29G/T27G/T23G IP phones, you can set the transmission speed to 1000Mbps/Auto Negotiation to transmit in 1000Mbps if the IP phone is connected to the switch supports Gigabit Ethernet.

  • Page 91: Configuring Pc Port Mode

    Setting Up Your System Configuring PC Port Mode The PC port on the back of the IP phone is used to connect a PC. You can enable or disable the PC port on the IP phones via web user interface or using configuration files. PC port is not applicable to CP860/CP920 IP phones.

  • Page 92: Web Server Type

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Select Auto Negotiation from the pull-down list of PC Port Active. Click Confirm to accept the change. A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot. Click OK to reboot the phone.
  • Page 93 Setting Up Your System When you enable user to access web user interface of the IP phone using the HTTP/HTTPS protocol (take HTTPS protocol for example): When you disable user to access web user interface of the IP phone using the HTTP/HTTPS protocol (take HTTPS protocol for example): Procedure Web server type can be configured using the following methods.
  • Page 94 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Configure the web access type, HTTP Phone User Interface port and HTTPS port. Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default static.wui.http_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the user to access web user interface of the IP phone using the HTTP protocol.
  • Page 95 Setting Up Your System Parameters Permitted Values Default effect. Web User Interface: Network->Advanced->Web Server->HTTPS Phone User Interface: Menu->Advanced (default password: admin) ->Network->Web Server->HTTPS Status static.network.port.https Integer from 1 to 65535 Description: Configures the HTTPS port for the user to access web user interface of the IP phone using the HTTPS protocol.

  • Page 96: Wi-Fi

    Wi-Fi feature enables users to connect their phones to the organization’s wireless network. The wireless network is more convenient and cost-effective than wired network. Wi-Fi feature is only applicable to SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T42S/T41S/T29G/T27G/CP920 IP phones. When the Wi-Fi feature is enabled, the IP phone will automatically scan the available wireless...
  • Page 97 Setting Up Your System networks. All the available wireless networks will display in scanning list on the LCD screen. You can store up to 5 frequently-used wireless networks on your phone and specify the priority for them. To use Wi-Fi feature on SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T42S/T41S/T29G/T27G IP phones,, make Note It is sure the Wi-Fi USB dongle is properly connected to the USB port on the back of the phone (...
  • Page 98 Configures the profile name of the wireless network X for the IP phone. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “static.wifi.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled). It is only applicable to SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T42S/T41S/T29G/T27G/CP920 IP phones. Web User Interface: Network->Wi-Fi->Profile Name...
  • Page 99 Configures the priority for the wireless network X for the IP phone. 5 is the highest priority, 1 is the lowest priority. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “static.wifi.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled). It is only applicable to SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T42S/T41S/T29G/T27G/CP920 IP phones. Web User Interface: Network->Wi-Fi->Change Priority...
  • Page 100 Configures the password of the wireless network X. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “static.wifi.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled) and “static.wifi.X.security_mode” is set to WEP, WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK. It is only applicable to SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T42S/T41S/T29G/T27G/CP920 IP phones. Web User Interface: Network->Wi-Fi->PSK Phone User Interface: Menu->Basic->Wi-Fi->Wi-Fi (On)->Add->WPA Shared Key...
  • Page 101 Setting Up Your System Enter the desired password in the PSK field. Click Add to accept the change. Repeat steps 2 to 5 to add more wireless networks. To adjust the priority of the added wireless network via web user interface: Click on Network->Wi-Fi.

  • Page 102: Vlan

    In addition to manual configuration, the IP phone also supports automatic discovery of VLAN via LLDP, CDP or DHCP. The assignment takes effect in this order: assignment via LLDP/CDP, manual configuration, then assignment via DHCP. VLAN Feature on Yealink IP Phones For more information on VLAN, refer to Procedure VLAN assignment method can be configured using the configuration files.
  • Page 103 Setting Up Your System Details of Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default static.network.vlan.vlan_change.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to obtain VLAN ID using lower priority of VLAN assignment method or disable VLAN feature when the IP phone cannot obtain VLAN ID using the current VLAN assignment method.
  • Page 104 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Procedure LLDP can be configured using the following methods. Configure LLDP feature. Central Provisioning Parameters: <y0000000000xx>.cfg static.network.lldp.enable (Configuration File) static.network.lldp.packet_interval Configure LLDP feature. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p= network-adv&q=load Configure LLDP feature.
  • Page 105 Setting Up Your System Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: Network->Advanced->LLDP->Packet Interval (1~3600s) Phone User Interface: Menu->Advanced (default password: admin) ->Network->LLDP->Packet Interval To configure LLDP feature via web user interface: Click on Network->Advanced. In the LLDP block, select the desired value from the pull-down list of Active. Enter the desired time interval in the Packet Interval (1~3600s) field.
  • Page 106 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones allows the IP phones to be plugged into any switch, obtain their VLAN IDs, and then start communications with the call control. Procedure CDP can be configured using the following methods. Configure CDP feature.
  • Page 107 Setting Up Your System Parameters Permitted Values Default (Enabled). If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect. Web User Interface: Network->Advanced->CDP->Packet Interval (1~3600s) Phone User Interface: Menu->Advanced (default password: admin) ->Network->CDP->Packet Interval To configure CDP via web user interface: Click on Network->Advanced.
  • Page 108 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Procedure VLAN can be configured using the following methods. Configure VLAN for the Internet port and PC port manually. Parameters: static.network.vlan.internet_port_enable Central <y0000000000xx> static.network.vlan.internet_port_vid Provisioning .cfg static.network.vlan.internet_port_priority (Configuration File) static.network.vlan.pc_port_enable static.network.vlan.pc_port_vid static.network.vlan.pc_port_priority Configure VLAN for the Internet port and PC...
  • Page 109 Setting Up Your System Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures VLAN ID for the Internet port. Note: If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect. Web User Interface: Network->Advanced->VLAN->WAN Port->VID (1-4094) Phone User Interface: Menu->Advanced (default password: admin) ->Network->VLAN->WAN Port->VID Number static.network.vlan.internet_port_priority...
  • Page 110 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default 4094 Description: Configures VLAN ID for the PC port. Note: It is not applicable to CP860/CP920 IP phones. It works only if the value of the parameter “static.network.pc_port.enable”...
  • Page 111 Setting Up Your System Select the desired value (0-7) from the pull-down list of Priority. Click Confirm to accept the change. A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot. Click OK to reboot the phone. To configure VLAN for PC port via web user interface: Click on Network->Advanced.
  • Page 112 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Status field. Enter the VLAN ID (1-4094) in the VID Number field. Enter the priority value (0-7) in the Priority field. Press the Save soft key to accept the change. A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot.
  • Page 113 Setting Up Your System Parameters Permitted Values Default effect. Web User Interface: Network->Advanced->VLAN->DHCP VLAN->Active Phone User Interface: Menu->Advanced (default password: admin) ->Network->VLAN->DHCP VLAN->DHCP VLAN static.network.vlan.dhcp_option Integer from 1 to 255 Description: Configures the DHCP option from which the IP phone will obtain the VLAN settings. You can configure at most five DHCP options and separate them by commas.

  • Page 114: Ipv6 Support

    IPv6 is developed by the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) to deal with the long- anticipated problem of IPv4 address exhaustion. Yealink IP Phone supports IPv4 addressing mode, IPv6 addressing mode, as well as an IPv4&IPv6 dual stack addressing mode. IPv4 uses a 32-bit address, consisting of four groups of three decimal digits separated by dots;...
  • Page 115 Setting Up Your System sends out Router Advertisement announcements onto the link. These announcements can allow the on-link connected IP phone to configure itself with IPv6 address, as specified in RFC 4862. Stateful DHCPv6: The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for IPv6 (DHCPv6) has been ...
  • Page 116 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Configure the IPv6 static DNS address. Parameters: static.network.ipv6_primary_dns static.network.ipv6_secondary_dns Configure the IPv6 static DNS. <y0000000000xx>.cf Parameter: static.network.ipv6_static_dns_enable Configure the IPv6 address assignment method. Configure the IPv6 static DNS address. Configure the IPv6 static DNS. Web User Interface Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=net...
  • Page 117 Setting Up Your System Permitted Parameters Default Values Description: Configures the Internet port type for IPv6. 0-DHCP 1-Static IP Address Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “static.network.ip_address_mode” is set to 1 (IPv6) or 2 (IPv4 & IPv6). If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect.
  • Page 118 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values 1 (IPv6) or 2 (IPv4 & IPv6), and "static.network.ipv6_internet_port.type" is set to 1 (Static IP Address). If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect.
  • Page 119 Setting Up Your System Permitted Parameters Default Values IP) ->Default Gateway static.network.ipv6_primary_dns IPv6 address Blank Description: Configures the primary IPv6 DNS server. Example: static.network.ipv6_primary_dns = 3036:1:1:c3c7: c11c:5447:23a6:256 Note: It works only if the value of the parameter "static.network.ip_address_mode" is set to 1 (IPv6) or 2 (IPv4 &...
  • Page 120 1-Enabled Note: If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect. It is only applicable to SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G IP phones. SLAAC is enabled on SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S/T40P/T40G/T27P/T27G/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860/CP920 IP phones by default. You are not allowed to configure this parameter for those IP phones.
  • Page 121 Setting Up Your System In the IPv6 Config block, mark the DHCP or the Static IP Address radio box. If you mark the Static IP Address radio box, configure the IPv6 address and other configuration parameters in the corresponding fields. (Optional.) If you mark the DHCP radio box, you can configure the static DNS address in the corresponding fields.
  • Page 122 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones To configure SLAAC feature via web user interface: Click on Network->Advanced. In the ICMPv6 Status block, select the desired value from the pull-down list of Active. Click Confirm to accept the change. A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot.
  • Page 123 Setting Up Your System Press the Save soft key to accept the change. A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot. Click OK to reboot the phone. VPN (Virtual Private Network) is a secured private network connection built on top of public telecommunication infrastructure, such as the Internet.
  • Page 124 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones configuration file (vpn.cnf) for Yealink IP phones: VPN files Description Unified Directories ca.crt CA certificate /config/openvpn/keys/ca.crt client.crt Client certificate /config/openvpn/keys/client.crt client.key Private key of the client /config/openvpn/keys/client.key OpenVPN Feature on Yealink IP phones...
  • Page 125 Setting Up Your System Parameters Permitted Values Default static.openvpn.url URL within 511 characters Blank Description: Configures the access URL of the *.tar file for OpenVPN. Example: static.openvpn.url = http://192.168.10.25/OpenVPN.tar Web User Interface: Network->Advanced->VPN->Upload VPN Config Phone User Interface: None To upload a TAR file and configure VPN via web user interface: Click on Network->Advanced.

  • Page 126: Network Address Translation (Nat)

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones To configure VPN via phone user interface after uploading a TAR file: Press Menu->Advanced (default password: admin) ->Network->VPN. Press , or the Switch soft key to select the desired value from the VPN Active field.

  • Page 127: Nat Traversal

    NAT gateways, typically required for client-to-client networking applications, especially for VoIP deployments. Yealink IP phones support three NAT traversal techniques: manual NAT, STUN and ICE. If manual NAT and STUN are all enabled, the IP phone will use the manually configured external IP address for NAT traversal.
  • Page 128 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones STUN (Simple Traversal of UDP over NATs) STUN is a network protocol, used in NAT traversal for applications of real-time voice, video, messaging, and other interactive IP communications. The STUN protocol allows entities behind a NAT to first discover the presence of a NAT and the type of NAT (for more information on the NAT types, refer to NAT Types...
  • Page 129 Setting Up Your System TURN (Traversal Using Relays around NAT) TURN is a network protocol described in 5766, allows a host located behind a NAT (called the TURN client) to communicate and exchange packets with other hosts (peers, called the TURN server) using a relay.
  • Page 130 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones short media path in the same network would be chosen, which will probably have better quality than the long one. ICE is a complex solution to the problem of NAT traversal. Due to its complexity there is very limited client support for ICE today.
  • Page 131 Setting Up Your System sip.nat_turn.username sip.nat_turn.password Configure local SIP port and TLS SIP port. Parameters: sip.listen_port sip.tls_listen_port Configure NAT traversal on a per-line basis. <MAC>.cfg Parameter: account.X.nat.nat_traversal Configure manual NAT feature on a phone basis. Configure ICE feature. Configure TURN feature and TURN server.
  • Page 132 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default sip.nat_stun.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the STUN (Simple Traversal of UDP over NATs) feature on the IP phone. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect.
  • Page 133 Enables or disables the NAT traversal for account X. 0-Disabled 1-STUN 2-Manual NAT X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G)
  • Page 134 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect. Web User Interface: Network->NAT->Nat Manual->Active Phone User Interface: None network.static_nat.addr IP address...
  • Page 135 Setting Up Your System Parameters Permitted Values Default sip.nat_turn.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the TURN (Traversal Using Relays around NAT) feature on the IP phone. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect.
  • Page 136 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Network->NAT->TURN->TURN Port (1~65535) Phone User Interface: None sip.nat_turn.username String Blank Description: Configures the user name to authenticate to TURN (Traversal Using Relays around NAT) server. Example: sip.nat_turn.username = admin Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “sip.nat_turn.enable”...
  • Page 137 Setting Up Your System Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: None 0, Integer from 1024 sip.tls_listen_port 5061 to 65535 Description: Configures the local TLS listen port. If it is set to 0, the IP phone will not listen the TLS service. Web User Interface: Settings->SIP->TLS SIP Port Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 138 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Enter the external IP address in the IP Address field. Click Confirm to accept the change. A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot. Click OK to reboot the phone.
  • Page 139 Setting Up Your System Select STUN/Manual NAT from the pull-down list of NAT. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure local SIP port and TLS SIP port via web user interface: Click on Settings->SIP. Enter the desired local SIP port in the Local SIP Port field. Enter the desired TLS SIP port in the TLS SIP Port field.
  • Page 140 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones To configure NAT traversal and STUN server via phone user interface: Press Menu->Advanced (default password: admin) ->Network->NAT->NAT Status. Press , or the Switch soft key to select the desired value from the NAT Status field.
  • Page 141 3-Notify (the IP phone sends SIP NOTIFY packets to the server) If it is set to 0 (Disabled), the IP phone will not send keep-alive packets. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S)
  • Page 142 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default to 1, 2 or 3. Web User Interface: Account->Advanced->Keep Alive Interval(Seconds) Phone User Interface: None To configure the type of keep-alive packets and keep-alive interval via web user interface: Click on Account->Advanced.
  • Page 143 Enables or disables NAT Rport feature for account X. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled 2-Enable Direct Process X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G)

  • Page 144: Quality Of Service (Qos)

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Select the desired value from the pull-down list of RPort. Click Confirm to accept the change. Quality of Service (QoS) Quality of Service (QoS) is the ability to provide different priorities for different packets in the network, allowing the transport of traffic with special requirements.

  • Page 145: Voice Qos

    Setting Up Your System be given different forwarding assurances. Default PHB -- specifies that a packet marked with a DSCP value of “000000” gets the  traditional best effort service from a DS-compliant node. VoIP is extremely bandwidth and delay-sensitive. QoS is a major issue in VoIP implementations, regarding how to guarantee that packet traffic not be delayed or dropped due to interference from other lower priority traffic.
  • Page 146 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default static.network.qos.audiotos Integer from 0 to 63 Description: Configures the DSCP (Differentiated Services Code Point) for voice packets. The default DSCP value for RTP packets is 46 (Expedited Forwarding). Note: If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect.

  • Page 147: X Authentication

    Setting Up Your System Enter the desired value in the SIP QoS (0~63) field. Click Confirm to accept the change. A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot. Click OK to reboot the phone. 802.1X Authentication IEEE 802.1X authentication is an IEEE standard for Port-based Network Access Control (PNAC), part of the IEEE 802.1 group of networking protocols.
  • Page 148 If the authentication server determines the credentials are valid, the IP phone is allowed to access resources located on the protected side of the network. Yealink IP phones support the following protocols for 802.1X authentication: EAP-MD5 ...
  • Page 149 Setting Up Your System static.network.802_1x.anonymous_identity static.network.802_1x.identity static.network.802_1x.md5_password static.network.802_1x.root_cert_url static.network.802_1x.client_cert_url Configure the 802.1X authentication. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=netwo rk-adv&q=load Configure the 802.1X authentication. Phone User Interface Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default static.network.802_1x.mode 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7 Description: Configures the 802.1x authentication method.
  • Page 150 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Configures the EAP In-Band provisioning method for EAP-FAST. 0-Unauthenticated Provisioning 1-Authenticated Provisioning If it is set to 0 (Unauthenticated Provisioning), EAP In-Band provisioning is enabled by server unauthenticated PAC (Protected Access Credential) provisioning using anonymous Diffie-Hellman key exchange.
  • Page 151 Permitted Values Default static.network.802_1x.identity = yealink Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “static.network.802_1x.mode” is set to 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7. If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect.
  • Page 152 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default None URL within 511 static.network.802_1x.client_cert_url Blank characters Description: Configures the access URL of the device certificate. Example: static.network.802_1x.client_cert_url = http://192.168.1.10/client.pem Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “static.network.802_1x.mode” is set to 2 (EAP-TLS).
  • Page 153 Setting Up Your System If you select EAP-TLS: (Optional.) Enter the anonymous user name for authentication in the Anonymous Identity field. Enter the user name for authentication in the Identity field. Leave the MD5 Password field blank. In the CA Certificates field, click Browse to select the desired CA certificate (*.pem, *.crt, *.cer or *.der) from your local system.
  • Page 154 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Click Upload to upload the certificate. If you select EAP-TTLS/EAP-MSCHAPv2: (Optional.) Enter the anonymous user name for authentication in the Anonymous Identity field. Enter the user name for authentication in the Identity field. Enter the password for authentication in the MD5 Password field.
  • Page 155 Setting Up Your System If you select EAP-PEAP/GTC: (Optional.) Enter the anonymous user name for authentication in the Anonymous Identity field. Enter the user name for authentication in the Identity field. Enter the password for authentication in the MD5 Password field. In the CA Certificates field, click Browse to select the desired CA certificate (*.pem, *.crt, *.cer or *.der) from your local system.
  • Page 156 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones In the CA Certificates field, click Browse to select the desired CA certificate (*.pem, *.crt, *.cer or *.der) from your local system. Click Upload to upload the certificate. If you select EAP-FAST: (Optional.) Enter the anonymous user name for authentication in the Anonymous Identity field.
  • Page 157 Setting Up Your System The CA certificate needs to be uploaded only when Authenticated Provisioning mode is selected from the Provisioning Mode field. Click Upload to upload the certificate. Click Confirm to accept the change. A dialog box pops up to prompt that settings will take effect after a reboot. Click OK to reboot the phone.

  • Page 158: Setting Up Your Phones With A Provisioning Server

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones If you select EAP-PEAP/GTC: Enter the user name for authentication in the Identity field. Enter the password for authentication in the MD5 Password field. If you select EAP-TTLS/EAP-GTC: Enter the user name for authentication in the Identity field. Enter the password for authentication in the MD5 Password field.

  • Page 159: Provisioning Methods

    Setting Up Your System use those previous settings. Provisioning Methods IP phones can be configured automatically through configuration files stored on a central provisioning server, manually via web user interface or phone user interface, or by a combination of the automatic and manual methods. If a central provisioning server is not available, you can configure most features using manual method.
  • Page 160 For more information on resource files, refer to Resource Files on page 140. Yealink IP phones support keeping user personalized configuration settings using the MAC- local CFG file. For more information on this file, refer to MAC-local CFG File on page 139.

  • Page 161: Phone User Interface

    (default: admin). For more information on configuring password, refer to User and Administrator Passwords on page 923. Yealink If you want to reset all settings made from the phone user interface to default, refer to phone-specific user guide...

  • Page 162: Boot Files, Configuration Files And Resource Files

     Boot Files Yealink IP phones running firmware version 81 or later support a new boot file in which you can customize the download sequence of configuration files. It is efficiently for you to provision your IP phones in different deployment scenarios, especially when you want to apply a set of features or settings to a group of phones.
  • Page 163 If you do not use the boot file for auto provisioning, overwrite mode is disabled by default and you are not allowed to enable it. Yealink SIP IP Phones Auto For more information on how to customize boot file, refer to...

  • Page 164: Configuration Files

    The configuration files are valid CFG files that can be created or edited using a text editor such as UltraEdit. An administrator can deploy and maintain a mass of Yealink IP phones automatically through configuration files stored on a provisioning server.
  • Page 165 Setting Up Your System IP Phone Model Common CFG file SIP-T19(P) E2 y000000000053.cfg CP860 y000000000037.cfg CP920 y000000000078.cfg MAC-Oriented CFG File MAC-Oriented CFG file, named <MAC>.cfg, contains parameters unique to a particular phone, such as account registration. It will only be effectual for a specific IP phone. The MAC-Oriented CFG file is named after the MAC address of the IP phone.

  • Page 166: Resource Files

    This especially useful when you want to apply a set of features or settings to a group of phones using the boot file. Yealink SIP IP Phones Auto For more information on how to create a new CFG file, refer to...
  • Page 167 Setting Up Your System Files/Resource Files on page 142. If you want to delete resource files from a phone at a later date - for example, if you are giving the phone to a new user - you can reset the IP phone to factory configuration settings. For more information, refer to Resetting Issues on page 995.
  • Page 168 Obtaining Boot Files/Configuration Files/Resource Files Yealink supplies some template configuration files and resource files for you, so you can directly edit and customize the files as required. You can ask the distributor or Yealink FAE for template files. You can also obtain the template files online: http://support.yealink.com/documentFront/forwardToDocumentFrontDisplayPage.
  • Page 169 For more information, refer to Loading 1.English_note.xml Language Packs on page 267. 1.English.js ime.txt Allow you to customize the existing input method on Yealink IP Keypad Input Russian_ime.txt phones. For more information, refer to Keypad Input Method Method File Customization on page 277.
  • Page 170 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Template File Description File Name For more information, refer to Customizing a Directory Template File on page 335. Allows you to customize the search source list for your IP phone. For Super Search super_search.xml more information, refer to...

  • Page 171: Setting Up A Provisioning Server

    Open the folder you extracted and identify the template file you will edit according to the table introduced above. For some features, you can customize the filename as required. The following table lists the special characters supported by Yealink IP phones: Server HTTP/HTTPS...

  • Page 172: Supported Provisioning Protocols

    During the auto provisioning process, the IP phone will download and update configuration files to the phone flash. For Yealink SIP IP Phones Auto Provisioning more information on auto provisioning, refer to Guide_V81 .The IP phones can be configured to periodically upload the log files to the...

  • Page 173: Deploying Phones From The Provisioning Server

    Otherwise, configurations may not take effect, and the IP phone will behave without exception. Before you configure parameters in the configuration files, Yealink recommends that you create new configuration files containing only those parameters that require changes.

  • Page 174: Upgrading Firmware

    Static: You can manually configure the server address via phone user interface or web  user interface. Yealink SIP IP Phones Auto Provisioning For more information on the above methods, refer to Guide_V81 Upgrading Firmware This section provides information on upgrading the IP phone firmware.
  • Page 175 The following table lists the associated and latest firmware name for each IP phone model (X is replaced by the actual firmware version). Associated IP Phone Model Firmware Name Example Firmware Name SIP-T54S/T52S 70.81.0.10.rom 70.x.x.x.rom (T5S firmware unified) SIP- T48S/T46S/T42S/T41S 66.x.x.x.rom...
  • Page 176 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Method of checking for configuration files is configurable. Procedure Configuration changes can be performed using the following methods. Configure the way for the IP phone to check for configuration files. Parameters: static.auto_provision.power_on static.auto_provision.repeat.enable...
  • Page 177 Configuring Basic Features Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default static.auto_provision.power_on 0 or 1 Description: Triggers the power on feature to on or off. 0-Off 1-On If it is set to 1 (On), the IP phone will perform an auto provisioning process when powered Web User Interface: Settings->Auto Provision->Power On Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 178 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default None static.auto_provision.weekly.enable 0 or 1 Description: Triggers the weekly feature to on or off. 0-Off 1-On If it is set to 1 (On), the IP phone will perform an auto provisioning process weekly. Web User Interface: Settings->Auto Provision->Weekly Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 179 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default only when the IP phone has been inactivated for 60 minutes (1 hour) between the starting time and ending time. Note: The IP phone may perform an auto provisioning process when you are using the IP phone on office hour.
  • Page 180 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the days of the week for the IP phone to perform an auto provisioning process weekly. 0-Sunday 1-Monday 2-Tuesday 3-Wednesday 4-Thursday 5-Friday 6-Saturday Example: static.auto_provision.weekly.dayofweek = 01 If the value of the parameter “static.auto_provision.weekly_upgrade_interval”...
  • Page 181 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default every reboot. Web User Interface: Settings->Auto Provision->Flexible Auto Provision Phone User Interface: None Integer from 1 to static.auto_provision.flexible.interval 1000 Description: Configures the interval (in days) for the IP phone to perform an auto provisioning process. The auto provisioning occurs on a random day within this period based on the phone's MAC address.
  • Page 182 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the ending time of the day for the IP phone to perform an auto provisioning process at random. If it is left blank or set to a specific value equal to starting time configured by the parameter “static.auto_provision.weekly.begin_time”, the IP phone will perform an auto provisioning process at the starting time.
  • Page 183 Configuring Basic Features Make the desired change. Click Confirm to accept the change. When the “Power On” is set to On, the IP phone will check boot files and configuration files stored on the provisioning server during startup and then will download firmware from the server.

  • Page 184: Keeping User Personalized Settings After Auto Provisioning

    SIP-T46G IP phones as example for reference. Note Yealink IP phones support FTP, TFTP, HTTP and HTTPS protocols for uploading the <MAC>- local.cfg file. This section takes the TFTP protocol as an example. Before performing the following, make sure the provisioning server supports uploading.
  • Page 185 Configuring Basic Features Configuration Parameters The following table lists the configuration parameters used to determine the phone behavior for keeping user personalized settings: Parameters Permitted Values Default static.auto_provision.custom.protect 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to keep user personalized settings after auto provisioning. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled If it is set to 1 (Enabled), <MAC>-local.cfg file generates and personalized non-static...
  • Page 186 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default None Phone User Interface: None static.auto_provision.custom.sync.path Blank Description: Configures the URL for uploading/downloading the <MAC>-local.cfg file. If it is left blank, the IP phone will try to upload/download the <MAC>-local.cfg file to/from the root directory of provisioning server.
  • Page 187 Triggering the IP Phone to Perform the how to trigger auto provisioning process, refer to Auto Provisioning Yealink SIP IP Phones Auto Provisioning Guide_V81 section in During auto provisioning, the IP phone first downloads the y000000000028.cfg file, and then downloads firmware from the root directory of the provisioning server.
  • Page 188 Trigger the IP phone to perform the auto provisioning process. For more information on Triggering the IP Phone to Perform the how to trigger auto provisioning process, refer to Auto Provisioning Yealink SIP IP Phones Auto Provisioning Guide_V81 section in .During auto provisioning, the IP phone first downloads the y000000000028.cfg file, and then downloads firmware from the root directory of the provisioning server.
  • Page 189 Configuring Basic Features because of the wrong configurations, the administrator or user may wish to clear user personalized configuration settings via phone/web user interface. Scenario Conditions: SIP-T46G IP phone MAC: 001565770984  The current firmware of the phone is 28.81.0.10 or later. ...
  • Page 190 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones To clear personalized configuration settings via web user interface: Click on Settings->Upgrade. Click Reset local settings. The web user interface prompts “Clear local.cfg settings?”. Click OK. Configurations in the 001565770984-local.cfg file saved on the phone will be cleared. If the IP phone is triggered to perform auto provisioning after resetting local configuration, it will download the configuration files from the provisioning server and update the configurations to the phone system.
  • Page 191 Configuring Basic Features To reset the phone to factory via phone user interface: Press Menu->Advanced (default password: admin) ->Reset Config. Select Reset to Factory Settings. The LCD screen prompts “Reset to factory setting?”. Press the OK soft key. The LCD screen prompts “Resetting to factory, please wait…”. The LCD screen prompts “Welcome Initializing…please wait”.
  • Page 192 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones To retrieve personalized settings of the phone after factory reset: Set the values of the parameters “static.auto_provision.custom.sync” and “static.auto_provision.custom.protect” to be 1 in the configuration file (y000000000028.cfg or 001565770984.cfg). Trigger the phone to perform the auto provisioning process. As the value of the parameter “static.auto_provision.custom.sync”...
  • Page 193 Configuring Basic Features Select Local Settings from the pull-down list of Export CFG Configuration File, and then click Export to open file download window, and then save the 001565770984-local.cfg file to the local system. The administrator or user can edit the 001565770984-local.cfg file after exporting. To import local configuration file via web user interface: Click on Settings->Configuration.
  • Page 194 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones...

  • Page 195: Configuring Basic Features

    Configuring Basic Features Configuring Basic Features This chapter provides information for making configuration changes for the following basic features: Power Indicator LED  Notification Popups  Contrast  Wallpaper  Transparency  Screen Saver  Power Saving  Backlight  Idle Clock Display ...
  • Page 196 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Hotline  Off Hook Hot Line Dialing  Off Hook Contact Dialing  Directory List  Search Source List In Dialing  Call Log  Call List Show Number  Missed Call Log ...

  • Page 197: Power Indicator Led

    Configuring Basic Features Feature Key Synchronization  Transfer Mode via Dsskey  Allow Trans Exist Call  Directed Call Pickup  Group Call Pickup  Dialog Info Call Pickup  Recent Call In Dialing  ReCall  Call Number Filter ...
  • Page 198 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Common Power Light On Common Power Light On allows the power indicator LED to be turned on. Ringing Power Light Flash Ringing Power Light Flash allows the power indicator LED to flash when the IP phone receives an incoming call.
  • Page 199 Configuring Basic Features http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=features- powerled&q=load Details of Configuration Parameters: Permitted Parameters Default Values phone_setting.common_power_led_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the power indicator LED to be turned on. For SIP- T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S/T40P/T40G/T29G/T27P/T 27G/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2 IP phones: 0-Disabled (power indicator LED is off) 1-Enabled (power indicator LED is solid red) For SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones: 0-Disabled (power indicator LED is off)
  • Page 200 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values Features->Power LED->Ringing Power Light Flash Phone User Interface: None phone_setting.mail_power_led_flash_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the power indicator LED to flash when the IP phone receives a voice mail or a text message.
  • Page 201 Configuring Basic Features Permitted Parameters Default Values Phone User Interface: None phone_setting.hold_and_held_power_led_flash_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the power indicator LED to flash when a call is placed on hold or is held. For SIP- T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S/T40P/T40G/T29G/T27P/T 27G/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2 IP phones: 0-Disabled (power indicator LED does not flash) 1-Enabled ( power indicator LED fast flashes (500ms) red) For SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones:...
  • Page 202 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values None phone_setting.missed_call_power_led_flash.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the power indicator LED to flash when the IP phone misses a call. For SIP- T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S/T40P/T40G/T29G/T27P/T 27G/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2 IP phones: 0-Disabled (power indicator LED does not flash) 1-Enabled (power indicator LED slowly flashes (1000ms) red) For SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones:...

  • Page 203: Notification Popups

    Configuring Basic Features Select the desired value from the pull-down list of MissCall Power Light Flash. Click Confirm to accept the change. Notification Popups Notification popups feature allows the IP phone to display the pop-up message box when it misses a call, forwards an incoming call to other party or receives a new voice mail or a new text message.
  • Page 204 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones features.forward_call_popup.enable features.text_message_popup.enable Configure notification popups. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=featu res-notifypop&q=load Details of Configuration Parameters: Permitted Parameters Default Values features.voice_mail_popup.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to display the pop-up message box when it receives a new voice mail.
  • Page 205 Configuring Basic Features Permitted Parameters Default Values Enables or disables the IP phone to display the pop-up message box when it forwards an incoming call to other party. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Web User Interface: Features->Notification Popups->Display Forward Call Popup Phone User Interface: None features.text_message_popup.enable 0 or 1...

  • Page 206: Contrast

    E2, CP860 and CP920 IP phones, EXP20 (connected to SIP-T29G/T27P/T27G IP phones) and EXP40 (connected to SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S IP phones). Make sure the expansion module has been connected to the IP phone before adjustment. It is not applicable to SIP-T54S/T52S/T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S IP phones. Procedure Contrast can be configured using the following methods.
  • Page 207 For T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860/CP920 IP phones, it configures the LCD’s contrast of the IP phone. Note: We recommend that you set the contrast of the LCD screen to 6 as a more comfortable level. It is not applicable to SIP-T54S/T52S/T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S IP phones. Web User Interface: For SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G:...

  • Page 208: Wallpaper

    SIP-T52S, SIP-T48G/S, SIP-T46G/S, SIP-T29G IP phones and EXP50 (connected to the SIP- T54S/T52S IP phones) expansion module. For SIP-T54S/T52S IP phones, you can also set a custom picture stored in your USB flash drive as the wallpaper. In order to do this, make sure the USB flash drive containing pictures is Yealink phone-specific user guide connected to your phone.
  • Page 209 The wallpaper image format must meet the following: Single File Phone Model Format Resolution Note Size <=4.2 SIP-T54S/T52S <=5MB 2MB of space megapixels *.jpg/*.png/*. should be bmp/*.jpeg reserved for the <=2.0 phone SIP-T48G/S <=5MB...
  • Page 210 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Single File Phone Model Format Resolution Note Size SIP- <=1.8 T46G/T46S/T2 <=5MB megapixels Procedure Wallpaper can be configured using the following methods. Configure the wallpaper displayed on the IP phone. Parameter: phone_setting.backgrounds Configure the wallpaper displayed on the...
  • Page 211 Default-exp50.jpg, 01-exp50.jpg, 02-exp50.jpg, 03-exp50.jpg, 04-exp50.jpg, 05-exp50.jpg, 06-exp50.jpg, 07-exp50.jpg, 08-exp50.jpg, 09-exp50.jpg or 10-exp50.jpg or custom wallpaper name (e.g., wallpaper.jpg) Example: expansion_module.backgrounds = Default-exp50.jpg Note: It is only applicable to EXP50 expansion modules connected to the SIP-T54S/T52S IP phones. Web User Interface:...
  • Page 212 Configures the access URL of the wallpaper image. Example: wallpaper_upload.url = http://192.168.10.25/wallpaper.jpg Note: It is only applicable to SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G IP phones. The format of the wallpaper image must be *jpg, *.png, *.bmp or *.jpeg (*.jpeg is only applicable to T54S/T52S IP phones).
  • Page 213 Configuring Basic Features To upload custom wallpaper via web user interface (take SIP-T48G IP phones for example): Click on Settings->Preference. In the Upload Wallpaper(800*480) field, click Browse to locate the wallpaper image from your local system. Click Upload to upload the file. The custom wallpaper appears in the pull-down lists of Wallpaper and Wallpaper with DSSkey unfold.
  • Page 214 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Select the desired wallpaper from the pull-down list of Wallpaper with DSSkey unfold. Click Confirm to accept the change. To change the wallpaper for expansion modules via web user interface: Click on Settings->Preference.

  • Page 215: Transparency

    Users can choose an appropriate transparency for DSS key labels and status bar on the idle screen as required. The transparency is only applicable to SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S IP phones. When the transparency is set to 100%:...
  • Page 216 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones When the transparency is set to 0%: Procedure Transparency can be configured using the following methods. Configure the transparency of the LCD screen. Central Provisioning <y0000000000xx>.cfg Parameter: (Configuration File) phone_setting.idle_dsskey_and_title .transparency Configure the transparency of the LCD screen.

  • Page 217: Screen Saver

    Configuring Basic Features Parameter Permitted Values Default phone_setting.idle_dsskey_and_title.transparency = 80% Note: It is also applicable when the DSS key list is unfolded. It is only applicable to SIP- T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S IP phones. Web User Interface: Settings->Preference->Transparency Phone User Interface: Menu->Basic->Display->Transparency To change the transparency via web user interface (take SIP-T48G IP phones for example): Click on Settings->Preference.
  • Page 218 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones For SIP-T54S/T52S IP phones, you can also set a custom picture stored in your USB flash drive as the screen saver. In order to do this, make sure the USB flash drive containing pictures is Yealink phone-specific user guide connected to your phone.
  • Page 219 Configuring Basic Features Specify the access URL of the custom screen saver image. Parameter: screensaver.upload_url Delete custom screen saver image. Parameter: screensaver.delete Configure the IP phone to display the clock and icons when the screen saver starts. Parameter: screensaver.display_clock.enable Configure the interval for the IP phone to change the picture when the screen saver starts.
  • Page 220 60-1min 120-2min 300-5min 600-10min 1800-30min 3600-1h 3200-2h 10800-3h 21600-6h Note: It is only applicable to SIP-T54S, SIP-T52S, SIP-T48G/S, SIP-T46G/S and SIP-T29G IP phones. Web User Interface: Settings->Preference->Screensaver Wait Time Phone User Interface: Menu->Basic->Display->Screensaver->Wait Time screensaver.type 0 or 1 Description: Configures the type of screen saver to display.
  • Page 221 Deletes the specified or all custom screen saver images. Example: Delete all custom screen saver images: screensaver.delete = http://localhost/all Delete a custom screen saver image (e.g., Screencapture.jpg): screensaver.delete = http://localhost/Screencapture.jpg Note: It is only applicable to SIP-T54S, SIP-T52S, SIP-T48G/S, SIP-T46G/S and SIP-T29G IP...
  • Page 222 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to display the clock and icons when the screen saver starts. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It is only applicable to SIP-T54S, SIP-T52S, SIP-T48G/S, SIP-T46G/S and SIP-T29G IP phones. Web User Interface: Settings->Preference->Screensaver Display Clock Phone User Interface: Menu->Basic->Display->Screensaver->Display Clock...
  • Page 223 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default 1 (Enabled). It is only applicable to SIP-T54S, SIP-T52S, SIP-T48G/S, SIP-T46G/S and SIP- T29G IP phones. Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None To upload custom screen saver via web user interface: Click on Settings->Preference.
  • Page 224 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Select System from the pull-down list of Screensaver Type. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure the screen saver wait time and screensaver display clock via web user interface: Click on Settings->Preference.

  • Page 225: Power Saving

    The power-saving feature is used to turn off the backlight and screen (turning off the screen is only applicable to SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G IP phones and EXP50 expansion module (connected to the SIP-T54S/T52S IP phones) to conserve energy. The IP phone and EXP50 (if connected) enter power-saving mode after the phone has been idle for a certain period of time.
  • Page 226 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Power saving can be configured using the following methods. Configure the power saving intelligent mode. Parameter: features.power_saving.intelligent_mode Configure the power saving feature. Parameter: features.power_saving.enable Configure the office hour. Parameters: features.power_saving.office_hour.monday Central features.power_saving.office_hour.tuesday Provisioning...
  • Page 227 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default 1-Enabled If it is set to 0 (Disabled), the IP phone stays in power-saving mode even if the office hour arrives the next day. If it is set to 1 (Enabled), the IP phone will automatically identify the office hour and exit power-saving mode once the office hour arrives the next day.
  • Page 228 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Integer from 1 to features.power_saving.off_hour.idle_timeout Description: Configures the time (in minutes) to wait in the idle state before the IP phone enters power- saving mode during the non-office hours. Example: features.power_saving.off_hour.idle_timeout = 5 The IP phone will enter power-saving mode when it has been inactivated for 5 minutes...

  • Page 229: Backlight

    Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Configures the starting time and ending time of the day’s office hour. Starting time and ending time are separated by a comma. Example: features.power_saving.office_hour.monday = 7,19 Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones. Web User Interface: Settings->Power Saving->Monday/Tuesday/Wednesday/Thursday/Friday/Saturday/Sunday Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 230 Unused BackLight is used to adjust the backlight intensity of the LCD screen when the phone is inactive. Active Backlight Level is applicable to SIP-T54S/T52S IP phones and the connected EXP50, SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S IP phones and the connected EXP40, SIP- T29G/T27P/T27G IP phones and the connected EXP20.
  • Page 231 Configuring Basic Features Phone Model (and Configuration Configuration Options the connected Methods expansion module) Phone User Backlight Time Interface T42G/S T41P/S Configuration Files T40P/G Web User Interface T23P/G Backlight Time Phone User T21(P) E2 Interface CP860 CP920 Procedure Backlight can be configured using the following methods. Configure the backlight of the LCD screen.
  • Page 232 For T29G/T27P/T27G IP phones, it configures the LCD’s intensity of the IP phone and the connected EXP20. Note: It is applicable to SIP-T54S/T52S IP phones and the connected EXP50, SIP- T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S IP phones and the connected EXP40, SIP-T29G/T27P/T27G IP phones and the connected EXP20.
  • Page 233 600-10min 1800-30min If it is set to 60 (1min), the intensity of the LCD screen will be changed when the IP phone has been inactivated for 60 seconds. For SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G: The default value is 0. For SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S/T40P/T40G/T27P/T27G/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/CP860/CP920: The default value is 30.

  • Page 234: Idle Clock Display

    Permitted Values Default phone_setting.idle_clock_display.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to display the idle clock. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It is only applicable to SIP-T54S IP phones. Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: Menu->Basic->Display->Idle Clock->Idle Clock Display...

  • Page 235: Bluetooth

    IP phone as a Bluetooth speaker for your mobile phone and PC. You can set up a conference among the calls on your IP phone, the PSTN and connected mobile phone. Yealink phone-specific user guide For more information, refer to the . It is only applicable to SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T42S/T41S/T29G/T27G/CP920 IP phones.
  • Page 236 Description: Configures the Bluetooth device name. For SIP-T54S IP phones: The default value is Yealink T54S. For SIP-T52S IP phones: The default value is Yealink T52S. For SIP-T48G IP phones: The default value is Yealink T48G. For SIP-T48S IP phones: The default value is Yealink T48S.
  • Page 237 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default The default value is Yealink T46G. For SIP-T46S IP phones: The default value is Yealink T46S. For SIP-T42S IP phones: The default value is Yealink T42S. For SIP-T41S IP phones: The default value is Yealink T41S.
  • Page 238 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Control->Media audio To activate the Bluetooth mode via web user interface: Click on Features->Bluetooth. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Bluetooth Active. Click Confirm to accept the change. To activate the Bluetooth mode via phone user interface: Press Menu->Basic->Bluetooth.

  • Page 239: Page Switch Key On

    Each page of the line keys has a corresponding page icon. For more information on page icon, refer to Enable Page Tips on page 214. It is only applicable to SIP-T54S/T52S/T46G/T46S/T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S/T29G/T27P/T27G IP phones. Procedure Page switch key can only be configured using the configuration files.

  • Page 240: Enable Page Tips

    Icons Description Fast-flashing: the BLF monitored user receives an incoming call on the non- current page. SIP-T54S/T52S/T46G/T46S/T29G Solid: there is a parked call to the line on the non-current page. Fast-flashing: the line receives an incoming call on the non-current...
  • Page 241 Configuring Basic Features Phone Models Icons Description page. Fast-flashing: The BLF monitored user receives an incoming call on the non-current page. SIP- The line receives an incoming call on T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G the non-current page. Solid: There is a parked call on the non- current page.

  • Page 242: Page Tips For Expansion Module

    You are allowed to configure the page switch key LED on the expansion module to indicate when BLF monitored user receives an incoming call on the non-current page. It is only applicable to EXP50 connected to the SIP-T54S/T52S IP phones. The following table lists the page switch key LED to indicate different statuses:...
  • Page 243 Enables or disables the page switch key LED on the expansion module to indicate when BLF monitored user receives an incoming call on the non-current pages. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It is only applicable to EXP50 expansion modules connected to the SIP-T54S/T52S IP phones. Web User Interface: None...

  • Page 244: Label Length

    Label length allows IP phones to extend the display length of the line key label on the idle screen. If the label length feature is enabled, more characters will be displayed on the idle LCD screen. Label length is only applicable to SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G IP phones. When label length feature is set to Default:...
  • Page 245 Configuring Basic Features For SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G IP phones, the display length of the line key label is extended and the characters are displayed in one line. SIP-T46G For SIP-T48G/S IP phones, the characters are displayed in two lines. SIP-T48G When label length feature is set to Mid-range, the idle screen can display 9 digits at most (for...
  • Page 246 1-Extended 2-Mid-range (only applicable to SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G IP phones) Note: For SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G IP phones, if it is set to 2 (Mid-range), the idle screen can display 9 digits at most. For SIP-T48G/T48S IP phones, the idle screen can display 9 digits at most by default. It is only applicable to SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G IP phones.

  • Page 247: Linekey Length In Short

    Configuring Basic Features Select Extended from the pull-down list of Label Length. Click Confirm to accept the change. Linekey Length in Short Linekey length in short allows IP phones to shorten the line key label when the phone places a call, receives a call, is during a call, or is idle (if large DND icon is enabled).
  • Page 248 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones The following figure shows an example of label display when it is set to 2 chars: The following figure shows an example of label display when it is set to No Label: Procedure Linekey length in short can be configured using the following methods.

  • Page 249: Account Registration

    Account Registration Registering an account makes it easier for the IP phones to receive an incoming call or dial an outgoing call. Yealink IP phones support registering multiple accounts on a phone; each account requires an extension or phone number.
  • Page 250 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Phone Model Accounts SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G <=6 SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G <=3 SIP-T21(P) E2 <=2 SIP-T19(P) E2 1 (SIP/Cloud account) CP860/CP920 <=2 (PSTN account) The IP phones support SIP server redundancy for account registration. For more information, refer to Server Redundancy on page 749.

  • Page 251: Sip Account

    Configuring Basic Features SIP Account Procedure SIP Account registration can be configured using the following methods. Configure the SIP account registration information. Parameters: account.X.enable account.X.label account.X.display_name account.X.auth_name account.X.user_name account.X.password Central Provisioning <MAC>.cfg account.X.sip_server.Y.address (Configuration File) account.X.sip_server.Y.port account.X.outbound_proxy_enable account.X.outbound_proxy.Y.address account.X.outbound_proxy.Y.port Configure the interval for the IP phone to retry to re-register when registration fails.
  • Page 252 Enables or disables the account X. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G)
  • Page 253 Description: Configures the display name to be displayed on the called party’s LCD screen for account X. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 254 Description: Configures the password for register authentication for account X. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G)
  • Page 255 65535 Description: Configures the port of the SIP server Y that specifies registrations for account X. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 256 Description: Configures the IP address or domain name of the outbound proxy server Y for account X. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 257 Configures the interval (in seconds) for the IP phone to retry to re-register account X when registration fails. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 258 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Enter the desired value in Label, Display Name, Register Name, User Name, Password and SIP Server1/2 field respectively. If you use outbound proxy servers, do the following: Select Enabled from the pull-down list of Enable Outbound Proxy Server. Enter the desired IP address or domain name in the Outbound Proxy Server 1/2 field and the desired port of the outbound proxy server 1/2 in the Port field respectively.

  • Page 259: Pstn Account

    Configuring Basic Features Enter the desired interval in the SIP Registration Retry Timer(0~1800s) field. Click Confirm to accept the change. To register an account via phone user interface: Press Menu->Advanced (default password: admin) ->Accounts. Select the desired account and then press the Enter soft key. Select Enabled from the Activation field.
  • Page 260 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Configure the PSTN account. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=accou nt-register&q=load&acc=0 Configure the PSTN account. Phone User Interface Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default pstn.account.X.enable 0 or 1 (X ranges from 1 to 2) Description: Enables or disables the PSTN account X.

  • Page 261: Multiple Line Keys Per Account

    241. It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2/CP860/CP920 IP phones. The number of the DSS keys associated with an account must meet the following: Ext Key (with expansion Phone Model Line Key modules connected) SIP-T54S <=27 <=180 SIP-T52S <=21 <=180 SIP-T48G/S <=29...
  • Page 262 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones The following shows two line keys associated with a registered account 101: When you customize multiple line keys to be associated with an account, you can configure the IP phone whether to transfer a call or set up a conference call using a new line key. Procedure Multiple line keys per account can be configured using the following methods.
  • Page 263 Configuring Basic Features Configure whether to set up a conference call using a new line key on a per-line basis. Parameter: account.X.phone_setting.call_appearance. conference_via_new_linekey Configure auto linekeys. Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=feat ures-general&q=load Web User Interface Configure the number of DSS keys to be assigned automatically.
  • Page 264 IP phone will skip to the next unused DSS key. The order of DSS key assigned automatically is Line Key->Ext Key. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S)
  • Page 265 Note that the per-line parameter takes precedence over the global parameter. X stands for the serial number of the account. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 266 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones account.X.phone_setting.call_appearance.transfer_via_new_linekey Global Parameter: phone_setting.call_appearance.transfer_via_new_linekey Per-Line Parameter: account.X.phone_setting.call_appearance.conference_via_new_linekey Global Parameter: phone_setting.call_appearance.transfer_via_new_linekey To configure auto linekeys feature via web user interface: Click on Features->General Information. Select Enabled from the pull-down list of Auto Linekeys. If Auto LineKeys is enabled, you can automatically assign multiple DSS keys with Line type for a registered line on the phone.

  • Page 267: Multiple Call Appearances

    Configuring Basic Features This field appears only if Auto Linekeys is enabled. Click Confirm to accept the change. Multiple Call Appearances You can enable each registered line on the phone to support multiple concurrent calls. For example, you can place one call on hold, switch to another call on the same registered line, and have both calls display.

  • Page 268: Call Display

    “phone_setting.call_appearance.calls_per_linekey”, and it takes precedence over the global parameter. X stands for the serial number of the account. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 269 Customizing a Local Contact File (Color Screen Phones) on page 355. Display contact photo feature is only applicable to SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G IP phones. Display called party information allows the IP phone to present the callee identity in addition to the presentation of caller identity when it receives an incoming call.
  • Page 270 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Procedure Call Display can be configured using the following methods. Configure display contact photo feature. Parameter: phone_setting.contact_photo_display.en able Configure display called party information feature. Parameter: phone_setting.called_party_info_display. Central Provisioning enable <y0000000000xx>.cfg (Configuration File) Specify the call information display method.
  • Page 271 Enables or disables the IP phone to display contact avatar when it receives an incoming call, dials an outgoing call or engages in a call. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It is only applicable to SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G IP phones. Web User Interface: Settings->Call Display->Display Contact Photo Phone User Interface: None phone_setting.called_party_info_display.enable...
  • Page 272 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Integer from 100 phone_setting.incoming_call.horizontal_roll_interval to 2000 Description: Configures the interval (in milliseconds) for the IP phone to horizontally scroll the caller information when the phone is ringing. Note: It is not applicable to CP860 IP phones.

  • Page 273: Display Method On Dialing

    Configuring Basic Features Display Method on Dialing When the IP phone is on the pre-dialing or dialing screen, the account information will be displayed on the top left corner of the LCD screen. You can customize the account information to be displayed on the IP phone as required. IP phones support three account information display methods: Label, Display Name or User Name.

  • Page 274: Time And Date

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameter Permitted Values Default Features->General Information->Display Method on Dialing Phone User Interface: None To configure display method on dialing via web user interface: Click on Features->General Information. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Display Method on Dialing. Click Confirm to accept the change.
  • Page 275 DD MMM YYYY 02 Sep, 2016 WWW DD MMM Fri, 02 Sep Yealink IP phones also support customizing date format. For example, YYYY-MMM-DDD- WWW, and W,MD, etc. For more information, refer to Time and Date Settings on page 255. The following table lists available configuration methods for time and date.

  • Page 276: Ntp Time Server

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Option Configuration Methods Configuration Files Daylight Saving Time Web User Interface NTP Time Server A time server is a computer server that reads the actual time from a reference clock and distributes this information to the clients in a network.
  • Page 277 Configuring Basic Features =settings-datetime&q=load Configure DHCP time feature. Phone User Interface Configure the NTP server, time zone. Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default local_time.manual_ntp_srv_prior 0 or 1 Description: Configures the priority for the IP phone to use the NTP server address offered by the DHCP server.
  • Page 278 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default local_time.ntp_server1 = 192.168.0.5 Web User Interface: Settings->Time & Date->Primary Server Phone User Interface: Menu->Basic->Time & Date->General->SNTP Settings->NTP Server1 local_time.ntp_server2 IP address or domain name pool.ntp.org Description: Configures the IP address or the domain name of the NTP server 2.
  • Page 279 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the time zone. For more available time zones, refer to Appendix B: Time Zones on page 1011. Example: local_time.time_zone = +8 Web User Interface: Settings->Time & Date->Time Zone Phone User Interface: Menu->Basic->Time &...
  • Page 280 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Select the desired value from the pull-down list of NTP by DHCP Priority. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure the NTP server, time zone via web user interface: Click on Settings->Time &...

  • Page 281: Time And Date Settings

    Configuring Basic Features Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure the NTP server and time zone via phone user interface: Press Menu->Basic->Time & Date->General->SNTP Settings. Press , or the Switch soft key to select the time zone that applies to your area from the Time Zone field.
  • Page 282 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Format Description It represents the long format of the day of week. W is used more than twice (e.g., WWW, WWWW) For example, Monday, Tuesday,…, Sunday Procedure Time and date can be configured using the following methods. Configure the time and date manually.
  • Page 283 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to obtain time and date from manual settings. 0-Disabled (obtain time and date from NTP server) 1-Enabled (obtain time and date from manual settings) Web User Interface: Settings->Time &...
  • Page 284 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default and “YY” represents a two-digit year. The value configured by the parameter “lcl.datetime.date.format” takes precedence over that configured by this parameter. Web User Interface: Settings->Time & Date->Date Format Phone User Interface: Menu->Basic->Time &...
  • Page 285 Configuring Basic Features Enter the time and date in the corresponding fields. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure the time and date formats via web user interface: Click on Settings->Time & Date. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Time Format. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Date Format.

  • Page 286: Daylight Saving Time (Dst)

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Format field. Press , or the Switch soft key to select the desired date format from the Date Format field. Press the Save soft key to accept the change. Daylight Saving Time (DST) Daylight Saving Time (DST) is the practice of temporary advancing clocks during the summer time so that evenings have more daylight and mornings have less.
  • Page 287 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: Settings->Time & Date->Daylight Saving Time Phone User Interface: Menu->Basic->Time & Date->General->SNTP Settings->Daylight Saving local_time.dst_time_type 0 or 1 Description: Configures the Daylight Saving Time (DST) time type. 0-DST by Date 1-DST by Week Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “local_time.summer_time”...
  • Page 288 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default local_time.start_time = 1/1/7/0 Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “local_time.summer_time” is set to 1 (Enabled). Web User Interface: Settings->Time & Date->Start Date Phone User Interface: None local_time.end_time...
  • Page 289 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the offset time (in minutes) of Daylight Saving Time (DST). Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “local_time.summer_time” is set to 1 (Enabled). Web User Interface: Settings->Time & Date->Offset(minutes) Phone User Interface: None To configure the DST via web user interface:...
  • Page 290 AutoDST file if required. The AutoDST file allows you to add or modify time zone and DST settings for your area each year. Before customizing, you need to obtain the AutoDST file. You can ask the distributor or Yealink FAE for DST template. You can also obtain the DST template online: http://support.yealink.com/documentFront/forwardToDocumentFrontDisplayPage.
  • Page 291 Configuring Basic Features Element Type Values Description Month: 1~12 Day: 1~31 Hour: 0 (midnight)~23 Month/Week of Month/Day of Week/Hour of Day (for iType=1) Month: 1~12 Week of Month: 1~5 (the last week) Day of Week: 1~7 Hour of Day: 0 (midnight)~23 optional Same as szStart Ending time of the DST...
  • Page 292 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Example 2: Add a new time zone (+6 Paradise) with daylight saving time 30 minutes. Save this file and place it to the provisioning server (e.g., 192.168.1.100). Specify the access URL of the AutoDST file in the configuration files. Procedure The access URL of the AutoDST file can be specified using the configuration files.

  • Page 293: Language On

    IP phone. Language packs can only be loaded using configuration files. You can ask the distributor or Yealink FAE for language packs. You can also obtain the...
  • Page 294 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones language packs online: http://support.yealink.com/documentFront/forwardToDocumentFrontDisplayPage. For more information on obtaining the language packs, refer to Obtaining Boot Files/Configuration Files/Resource Files on page 142. To modify translation of an existing language, do not rename the language file.
  • Page 295 Configuring Basic Features The following shows a portion of the language pack “000.GUI.English.lang” for the phone user interface (take SIP-T46G IP phones for example): Save the language file and place it to the provisioning server (e.g., 192.168.10.25). Specify the access URL of the phone user interface language pack in the configuration files.
  • Page 296 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Delete custom LCD language packs of the phone user interface. Parameter: gui_lang.delete Details of the Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default gui_lang.url URL within 511 characters Blank Description: Configures the access URL of the custom LCD language pack for the phone user interface. Example: gui_lang.url = http://192.168.10.25/000.GUI.English.lang During the auto provisioning process, the IP phone connects to the HTTP provisioning...
  • Page 297 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default None Phone User Interface: None Customizing a Language for Web User Interface The following table lists available languages and associated language packs for the web user interface: Associated Note Available Language Associated Language Pack Language Pack English 1.English.js...
  • Page 298 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones The following shows a portion of the language pack “1.English.js” for the web user interface (take SIP-T46G IP phones for example): Save the language file and place it to the provisioning server (e.g., 192.168.10.25). Specify the access URL of the web user interface language pack in the configuration files.
  • Page 299 Configuring Basic Features Save the language file and place it to the provisioning server (e.g., 192.168.10.25). Specify the access URL of the note language pack of the web user interface. If you want to add a new language (e.g., Wuilan) to IP phones, prepare the language file named as “12.Wuilan.js”...
  • Page 300 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default you can configure as following: wui_lang.url = http://192.168.10.25/1.English.js wui_lang.url = http://192.168.10.25/11.Russian.js Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None URL within 511 characters Blank wui_lang_note.url Description: Configures the access URL of the custom note language pack for web user interface.

  • Page 301: Specifying The Language To Use

    Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default The corresponding note language pack (e.g., 11.Russian_note.xml) will also be deleted. Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None Specifying the Language to Use The default language used on the phone user interface is English. If the language of your web browser is not supported by the IP phone, the web user interface will use English by default.
  • Page 302 If you want to use the custom language (e.g., Guilan) for the IP phone, configure the parameter “static.lang.gui = Guilan”. Note: For SIP-T42G/T41P/T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2 IP phones, they do not support Chinese by default. For more information, contact Yealink FAE. Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: Menu->Basic->Language...

  • Page 303: Input Method

    If you just want to customize the input method for a certain language, the filename must be formatted as “language name_ime.txt” (e.g., German_ime.txt). You can ask the distributor or Yealink FAE for keypad input method file. You can also obtain the keypad input method file online: http://support.yealink.com/documentFront/forwardToDocumentFrontDisplayPage.
  • Page 304 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones The following shows a portion of the keypad input method file “ime.txt”: The following shows a portion of the keypad input method file “Hebrew_ime.txt”:...
  • Page 305 Configuring Basic Features The following shows a portion of the keypad input method file “Russian_ime.txt”: To customize a keypad input method file: Open the desired keypad input method file (e.g., ime.txt) using an ASCII editor. Under the input method field (e.g., [abc]), add new characters or adjust the characters order within the double quotation marks on the right of the equal sign.
  • Page 306 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Save the keypad input method file and place it to the provisioning server (e.g., 192.168.10.25). Specify the access URL of the custom keypad input method file in the configuration files. When adding new characters for the existing input method, ensure that the added characters Note are supported by IP phones.

  • Page 307: Specifying The Default Input Method

    Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None http://localhost/all or gui_input_method.delete Blank Name.txt http://localhost/ Description: Delete the specified or all custom keypad input method files of the phone user interface. Example: Delete all custom keypad input method files: gui_input_method.delete = http://localhost/all Delete a custom keypad input method file (e.g., ime.txt) for the phone: gui_input_method.delete = http://localhost/ime.txt...

  • Page 308: Logo Customization

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default Abc, 2aB, 123, abc, ABC or directory.edit_default_input_method Hebrew Description: Configures the default input method when the user edits contacts in the Local Directory, LDAP, Remote Phone Book or Blacklist.

  • Page 309: Customizing A Logo Template File

    Configuring Basic Features In this example, a system logo (Yealink logo) is displayed on the image logo screen: Logo is not applicable to SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G IP phones. These IP phone models use wallpaper instead. For more information on wallpaper, refer to Wallpaper page 182.

  • Page 310: Configuring The Logo Shown On The Idle Screen

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones To customize a dob formatted logo file using the PictureExDemo tool: Double click the PictureExDemo.exe. Click Add button to open a *.bmp file. You can repeat the second step to add multiple original picture files. Click the Convert button.
  • Page 311 If it is set to 2 (Custom logo), the LCD screen will display the custom logo (you need to upload a custom logo file to the IP phone). Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G IP phones. Web User Interface: Features->General Information->Use Logo...
  • Page 312 During the auto provisioning process, the IP phone connects to the provisioning server “192.168.10.25”, and downloads the custom logo file “logo.dob”. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “phone_setting.lcd_logo.mode” is set to 2 (Custom logo). It is not applicable to SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G IP phones. Web User Interface: Features->General Information->Upload Logo...

  • Page 313: Softkey Layout

    Configuring Basic Features Click Upload to upload the file. Click Confirm to accept the change. Softkey Layout Softkey layout is used to customize the soft keys at the bottom of the LCD screen to best meet users’ requirements. In addition to specifying which soft keys to display, you can determine their display order.
  • Page 314 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Procedure Softkey layout can be configured using the following methods. Configure the softkey layout. Central Provisioning <y0000000000xx Parameter: >.cfg (Configuration File) phone_setting.custom_softkey_enable Configure the softkey layout. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=settings- softkey&q=load Details of Configuration Parameter:...

  • Page 315: Customizing Softkey Layout Template File

    CallFailed, CallIn, Connecting, Dialing (not applicable to SIP-T48G/S), RingBack, Talking and ConferenceManager (only applicable to CP920). You can ask the distributor or Yealink FAE for softkey layout template. You can also obtain the softkey layout template online: http://support.yealink.com/documentFront/forwardToDocumentFrontDisplayPage.
  • Page 316 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Call State Default Soft Keys Optional Soft Keys End Call Transfer SemiAttendTrans( Empty Empty (Transfer Empty Switch Connecting) End Call Empty History Send Switch Line Dialing (not applicable to SIP- T48G/S IP phones) Delete Favorite (Directory)
  • Page 317 Configuring Basic Features Call State Default Soft Keys Optional Soft Keys NewCall Answer End Call Reject Join（only applicable to CP920） Empty Switch Empty Answer Empty Held Reject Empty NewCall End Call Join（only applicable to CP920） Transfer Empty PreTrans (Transfer Directory To, not applicable to SIP-T48G/S IP Delete...
  • Page 318 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Create disabled soft keys between <Disable> and </Disable>.  <Enable> indicates the start of the enabled soft key list and </Enable> indicates the end  of the soft key list. The enabled soft keys are displayed on the LCD screen. Create enabled soft keys between <Enable>...
  • Page 319 Configuring Basic Features For each soft key that you want to disabled, just move the string in the enabled soft key list to disabled soft key list. Save the change and place this file to the provisioning server. Specify the access URL of the softkey layout template in the configuration files. Procedure Specify the access URL of the softkey layout template using the configuration files.
  • Page 320 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Configures the access URL of the custom file for the soft key presented on the LCD screen when in the CallFailed state. Example: custom_softkey_call_failed.url = http:// 192.168.1.20/XMLfiles/CallFailed.xml During the auto provisioning process, the IP phone connects to the provisioning server “192.168.1.20”, and downloads the CallFailed state file from the “XMLfiles”...
  • Page 321 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default None custom_softkey_dialing.url URL within 511 characters Blank Description: Configures the access URL of the custom file for the soft key presented on the LCD screen when in the Dialing state. Example: custom_softkey_dialing.url = http://192.168.1.20/XMLfiles/Dialing.xml During the auto provisioning process, the IP phone connects to the provisioning server “192.168.1.20”, and downloads the Dialing state file from the “XMLfiles”...

  • Page 322: Key As Send

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default During the auto provisioning process, the IP phone connects to the provisioning server “192.168.1.20”, and downloads the Talking state file from the “XMLfiles” directory. Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None...
  • Page 323 Configuring Basic Features Configure a send tone or key tone. Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet? p=features-audio&q=load Configure a send key. Phone User Interface Configure a key tone. Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default features.key_as_send 0, 1 or 2 Description: Configures the "#" or "*" key as the send key. 0-Disabled 1-# key 2-* key...
  • Page 324 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to play a key tone when a user presses a send key. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled If it is set to 1 (Enabled), the IP phone will play a key tone when a user presses a send key. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “features.key_tone”...

  • Page 325: Dial Plan

    “match” (specify and recognize) strings of text, such as particular characters, words, or patterns of characters. Yealink IP phones support two methods to help creating a dial plan: Dial Plan using XML...

  • Page 326: Dial Plan Using Xml Template Files

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Dial Plan using XML Template Files Yealink IP phones support the following dial plan features: Replace Rule  Dial  Area Code  Block Out  You can configure these dial plan features via web user interface or using configuration files.

  • Page 327: Replace Rule

    Configuring Basic Features Replace Rule Replace rule is an alternative string that replaces the numbers entered by the user. IP phones support up to 100 replace rules, which can be created either one by one or in batch using a replace rule template.
  • Page 328 Configures the desired line to apply the replace rule. The digit 0 stands for all lines. If it is left blank, the replace rule will apply to all lines on the IP phone. Permitted Values: 0 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) 0 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) 0 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 329 Customizing Replace Rule Template File The replace rule template helps with the creation of multiple replace rules. You can ask the distributor or Yealink FAE for replace rule template. You can also obtain the replace rule template online: http://support.yealink.com/documentFront/forwardToDocumentFrontDisplayPage. For more...
  • Page 330 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Phone Model Values Description 1~12 stand for line1~line12 0 stands for all lines SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G 1~6 stand for line1~line6 0 stands for all lines SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G 1~3 stand for line1~line3 0 stands for all lines SIP-T21(P) E2 1~2 stand for line1~line2 At most 100 replace rules can be added to the IP phone.

  • Page 331: Dial Now

    Configuring Basic Features Details of Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default URL within 511 characters dialplan_replace_rule.url Blank Description: Configures the access URL of the replace rule template file. Example: dialplan_replace_rule.url = http://192.168.10.25/dialplan.xml During the auto provisioning process, the IP phone connects to the provisioning server “192.168.10.25”, and downloads the replace rule file “dialplan.xml”.
  • Page 332 Configures the desired line to apply the dial now rule. The digit 0 stands for all lines. If it is left blank, the dial now rule will apply to all lines on the IP phone. Permitted Values: 0 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G)
  • Page 333 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default 0 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) 0 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G) 0 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G) 0 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) Example: dialplan.dialnow.line_id.1 = 1,2 Note: Multiple line IDs are separated by commas. It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2/CP860/CP920 IP phones.
  • Page 334 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones If you leave this field blank or enter 0, the dial now rule will apply to all accounts on the IP phone. Click Add to add the dial now rule. To configure the time out for dial now rule via web user interface: Click on Features->General Information.
  • Page 335 Configuring Basic Features files. You can ask the distributor or Yealink FAE for dial now template. You can also obtain the dial now template online: http://support.yealink.com/documentFront/forwardToDocumentFrontDisplayPage. For more information on obtaining the dial now template, refer to Obtaining Boot Files/Configuration Files/Resource Files on page 142.

  • Page 336: Area Code

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones If you want to change the dial now rule, specify the values within double quotes. Save the change and place this file to the provisioning server. Specify the access URL of the dial now template. Procedure Specify the access URL of the dial now template using the configuration files.
  • Page 337 Configuring Basic Features areas in one country. When entered numbers match the predefined area code rule, the IP phone will automatically add the area code before the numbers when dialing out them. IP phones only support one area code rule. Procedure Area code rule can be configured using the following methods.
  • Page 338 Configures the desired line to apply the area code rule. The digit 0 stands for all lines. If it is left blank, the area code rule will apply to all lines on the IP phone. Permitted Values: 0 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) 0 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) 0 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G)

  • Page 339: Block Out

    Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Note: Multiple line IDs are separated by commas. It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2/CP860/CP920 IP phones. It works only if the values of the parameters “dialplan.digitmap.enable” and “account.X.dialplan.digitmap.enable” are set to 0 (Disabled). Web User Interface: Settings->Dial Plan->Area Code->Account Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 340 Configures the desired line to apply the block out rule. The digit 0 stands for all lines. If it is left blank, the block out rule will apply to all lines on the IP phone. Permitted Values: 0 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) 0 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) 0 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G)

  • Page 341: Dial Plan Using Digit Map String Rules

    Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default “dialplan.digitmap.enable” and “account.X.dialplan.digitmap.enable” are set to 0 (Disabled). Web User Interface: Settings->Dial Plan->Block Out->Account Phone User Interface: None To create a block out rule via web user interface: Click on Settings->Dial Plan->Block Out. Enter the desired value in the BlockOut NumberX field.
  • Page 342 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Example: “12x” would match “121”, “122”, “123”, etc. The square bracket "[]" can be used as a placeholder for a single character which matches any of a set of characters. Example: "91[5-7]1234"...
  • Page 343 Configuring Basic Features dial tone. Example: “<9,:55>xx”, after entering digit “9”, secondary dial tone plays and you can complete the remaining two-digit number. Note: The secondary dial tone can be customized. For more information, refer to Tones on page 834. Procedure Digit map can be created using the configuration files.
  • Page 344 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones account.X.dialplan.digitmap.apply_to.press_s Details of Configuration Parameters: Permitted Parameters Default Values dialplan.digitmap.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the digit map feature for the IP phone. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: The value configured by the parameter “account.X.dialplan.digitmap.enable” takes precedence over that configured by this parameter.
  • Page 345 Configuring Basic Features Permitted Parameters Default Values Phone User Interface: None Integer dialplan.digitmap.interdigit_long_timer from 0 to Description: Configures the time (in seconds) for the IP phone to wait before dialing an entered number if it matches part of any string of the digit map. If it is set to 0, the IP phone will not dial the entered number if it only a partial match exists.
  • Page 346 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values The IP phone will wait this many seconds before matching the entered digits to the dial plan and placing the call. Valid values are: Single configuration (configure a specific value for the timer letter “T” for all strings ...
  • Page 347 Configuring Basic Features Permitted Parameters Default Values parameter “dialplan.digitmap.interdigit_long_timer” Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “dialplan.digitmap.enable” or “account.X.dialplan.digitmap.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled). The value configured by the parameter “account.X.dialplan.digitmap.no_match_action” takes precedence over that configured by this parameter. Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 348 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None dialplan.digitmap.apply_to.directory_dial 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the digit map to be applied to the numbers dialed from the directory. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “dialplan.digitmap.enable”...
  • Page 349 For example, “account.X.dialplan.digitmap.enable” takes precedence over “dialplan.digitmap.enable”. X stands for the serial number of the account. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G)

  • Page 350: Emergency Dialplan

    Emergency Dialplan Yealink IP phones support dialing emergency telephone numbers when the phone is locked (refer to Phone Lock). Due to the fact that the IP phone must have a registered account or a configured SIP server, it may not meet the need of dialing emergency telephone number at any time.
  • Page 351 Configuring Basic Features The IP Phones support Link Layer Discovery Protocol for Media Endpoint Devices (LLDP-MED). LLDP-MED allows the phone to use the location information, Emergency Location Identification Number (ELIN), sent by the switch, as a caller ID for making emergency calls. The outbound identity used in the P-Asserted-Identity (PAI) header of the SIP INVITE request is taken from the network using an LLDP-MED Emergency Location Identifier Number (ELIN).
  • Page 352 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default emergency call. If it is set to ELIN, the outbound identity used in the P-Asserted-Identity (PAI) header of the SIP INVITE request is taken from the network using an LLDP-MED Emergency Location Identifier Number (ELIN).
  • Page 353 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default routing calls. Note: If the account is registered successfully or failed (the account information has been configured), the emergency calls will be dialed using the following priority: SIP server>emergency server; if the account is not registered, the emergency server will be used.
  • Page 354 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the emergency number to use on your IP phone so a caller can contact emergency services in the local area when required. Default: When X = 1, the default value is 911; When X = 2-255, the default value is Blank.

  • Page 355: Hotline

    Configuring Basic Features Hotline Hotline, sometimes referred to as hot dialing, is a point-to-point communication link in which a call is automatically directed to the preset hotline number. The IP phone automatically dials out the hotline number using the first available line after a specified time interval when you lift the handset, press the Speakerphone/off-hook key or the line key.
  • Page 356 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Example: features.hotline_number = 1234 Note: Line key is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2, CP860 and CP920 IP phones; handset and Speakerphone key are not applicable to CP860 and CP920 IP phones; off-hook key is only applicable to CP860 and CP920 IP phones.

  • Page 357: Off Hook Hot Line Dialing

    Configuring Basic Features Enter the delay time in the Hotline Delay(0~10s) field. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure hotline via phone user interface: Press Menu->Features->Others->Hot Line. Enter the hotline number in the Hotline Number field. Enter the waiting time (in seconds) in the Hotline Delay field. Press the Save soft key to accept the change.
  • Page 358 “account.X.auto_dial_num”) when a user lifts the handset, presses the Speakerphone/off-hook key or desired line key, dials out a call using account X. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S)

  • Page 359: Off Hook Contact Dialing

    Configures the number that the IP phone first dials out when a user lifts the handset, presses the Speakerphone/off-hook key or desired line key, dials out a call using account X. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S)

  • Page 360: Directory List

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default features.call_out_history_by_off_hook.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to automatically dial out the selected entry from call history list once you go off hook or press the Speakerphone/off-hook key. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Web User Interface:...

  • Page 361: Customizing A Directory Template File

    Configuring Basic Features Customizing a Directory Template File You can ask the distributor or Yealink FAE for directory template. You can also obtain the directory template online: http://support.yealink.com/documentFront/forwardToDocumentFrontDisplayPage. For more information on obtaining the directory template, refer to Obtaining Boot Files/Configuration Files/Resource Files on page 142.
  • Page 362 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Customizing a directory template: Open the template file using an ASCII editor. For each directory list that you want to configure, edit the corresponding string in the file. For example, configure the local directory list, edit the values within double quotes in the following strings: <item id_name="localdirectory"...
  • Page 363 Configuring Basic Features Parameter Permitted Values Default Directory->Setting->Directory Phone User Interface: None To configure the directory via web user interface: Click on Directory->Setting. In the Directory block, select the desired list from the Disabled column and then click The selected list appears in the Enabled column. Repeat the step 2 to add more lists to the Enabled column.

  • Page 364: Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (Ldap) On

    Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) on page 591. Customizing a Super Search Template File You can ask the distributor or Yealink FAE for super search template. You can also obtain the super search template online: http://support.yealink.com/documentFront/forwardToDocumentFrontDisplayPage. For more information on obtaining the super search template, refer to...
  • Page 365 Configuring Basic Features Element Attribute Description The display name of the directory list. Local Contacts Note: We recommend you History do not edit this field. Remote Phonebook Network Directories and LDAP display_name BroadSoft Buddies lists are Network Directories hidden for IP phones in BroadSoft Buddies neutral firmware, which are PhoneBook...
  • Page 366 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameter: super_search.url Configure the search source list in dialing. Web User Interface Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =contacts-favorite&q=load Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default super_search.url URL within 511 characters Blank Description: Configures the access URL of the super search template file.

  • Page 367: Call Log

    Configuring Basic Features The LCD screen displays the search results in the adjusted order. Click Confirm to accept the change. Call Log Save Call Log IP phones record and maintain phone events to a call log, also known as a call list. The call log contains call information such as remote party identification, time and date of the call, and call duration.
  • Page 368 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Configure call log feature. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet? p=features-general&q=load Configure call log feature. Phone User Interface Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default features.save_call_history 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to save the call log.

  • Page 369: Backing Up The Call Logs

    Backing up the Call Logs Yealink IP phones support storing all call logs to a call log file named <MAC>-calllog.xml. You can back up this file to the server, avoiding data loss. Once the call logs update, the IP phone will automatically upload this file to the provisioning server or a specific server.
  • Page 370 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Procedure Backing up the call log file can be configured using the configuration files. Configure the IP phone to back up the call log. Parameters: static.auto_provision.local_calllog.ba Central Provisioning <y0000000000xx>.cfg ckup.enable (Configuration File) static.auto_provision.local_calllog.ba ckup.path...

  • Page 371: Call List Show Number

    Configuring Basic Features Permitted Parameters Default Values If it is left blank, the IP phone connects to the provisioning server URL, and uploads/downloads the contact file “<MAC>-calllog.xml”. Example: static.auto_provision.local_calllog.backup.path = http://192.168.1.20/calllog Once the call logs update, the IP phone will upload the call log file to the specified path “http://192.168.1.20/calllog”.
  • Page 372 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Procedure Call list show number can be configured using the following methods. Configure call list show number. Central Provisioning <y0000000000xx>.cfg Parameter: (Configuration File) features.call_log_show_num Configure call list show number. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =features-general&q=load...

  • Page 373: Missed Call Log

    Configuring Basic Features Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Call List Show Number. Click Confirm to accept the change. Missed Call Log Missed call log allows the IP phone to display the number of missed calls with an indicator icon on the idle screen, and to log missed calls in the Missed Calls list when the IP phone misses calls.
  • Page 374 If it is set to 1 (Enabled), the IP phone displays a prompt message and an indicator icon on the idle screen and logs the missed call in the Missed Calls list when it misses calls. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S)
  • Page 375 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to indicate and record missed calls for PSTN account X. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled If it is set to 0 (Disabled), the IP phone does not display a prompt message and an indicator icon on the idle screen and log the missed call in the Missed Calls list when it misses calls.

  • Page 376: Local Directory

    The existing local contacts on the IP phones will be overridden by the downloaded local contacts. You can ask the distributor or Yealink FAE for local contact template. You can also obtain the local contact template online: http://support.yealink.com/documentFront/forwardToDocumentFrontDisplayPage.
  • Page 377 XXX (e.g., Friend) Contact avatar. Format of the value: Note: It is only applicable Resource:avatar name (the built-in to SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/ default_photo avatar) T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G IP Config:avatar name (the custom avatar) phones. The following table lists valid values of line for each phone model.
  • Page 378 0~1 stand for line1~line2 The contact avatar format must meet the following: Single Phone Model Format Resolution File Size SIP-T48S/T46S <=110*110 <=5MB .jpg/.png/.bmp/.jpeg SIP-T54S/T52S SIP-T48G/T46G/T29G <=110*110 <=5MB The contact icon format must meet the following: Phone Format Resolution Model SIP-T48G/S .jpg/.png/.bmp/.jpeg <=41*41...
  • Page 379 The format of the contact avatar must be *.png, *.jpg, *.bmp or *.jpeg. The contact avatar file should be uploaded to the provisioning server in advance. Example: local_contact.photo.url = tftp://192.168.10.25/Photo.jpg Note: It is only applicable to SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G IP phones. Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None local_contact.icon_image.url...
  • Page 380 All avatars needed for contacts should be compressed as a TAR file in advance. Example: local_contact.data_photo_tar.url = tftp://192.168.10.25/Contact.tar Note: It is only applicable to SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G IP phones. The name of the avatars TAR file must be photo.tar (case-sensitive), and the name of the contact XML file must be ContactData.xml (case-sensitive).
  • Page 381 Configuring Basic Features Customizing a Local Contact File (Black-and-white Screen Phones) The following shows the procedure of customizing a local contact file for SIP- T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S/T40P/T40G/T27P/T27G/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860/CP920 IP phones: To customize a local contact file: Open the template file using an ASCII editor. For each group that you want to add, add the following string to the file.
  • Page 382 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G IP phones: Scenario A - Using the Built-in Avatar for Contact This scenario is applicable to SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G IP phones. To customize a local contact file: Open the template file using an ASCII editor.
  • Page 383 Configuring Basic Features Scenario B - Using the Custom Avatar for Contact This scenario is applicable to SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G IP phones. To specify custom avatars for contacts, you need to upload the custom avatars to the provisioning server in advance. In addition, you can also compress all the avatars as a tar formatted file, and then upload the tar formatted file to the provisioning server.
  • Page 384 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Select tar from the pull-down list of Archive format. Click the OK button. A photo.tar file is generated in the directory C:\Program Files\photo. Place this file to the provisioning server (e.g., 192.168.10.25). Customizing a Local Contact File To customize a local contact file: Open the template file using an ASCII editor.
  • Page 385 Configuring Basic Features default_photo="Config:cutom1.jpg"/> <contact display_name="Tom" office_number="2020" mobile_number="2021" other_number="2112" line="2" ring="Ring1.wav" group_id_name="Friend" default_photo="Config:cutom2.png"/> Save the change and place this file to the provisioning server. Specify the access URL of the custom local contact template in the configuration files. There are three methods to specify custom avatar for contacts: Method 1: local_contact.data.url = tftp://192.168.10.25/contact.xml local_contact.photo.url = tftp://192.168.10.25/cutom1.jpg...
  • Page 386 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones During the auto provisioning process, the IP phone connects to the provisioning server “192.168.10.25”, and downloads the file “Contact.tar”. Note that if you are using method 3 to specify custom avatar for contacts, the name of the avatars Note TAR file must be photo.tar (case-sensitive), and the name of the contact XML file must be ContactData.xml (case-sensitive).
  • Page 387 Configuring Basic Features <contact display_name="" office_number="" mobile_number="" other_number="" line="" ring="" group_id_name="" default_photo=""/> Specify the values within double quotes. For example: <group display_name="Friend" ring="Splash.wav"/> <contact display_name="Lily" office_number="1020" mobile_number="1021" other_number="1112" line="1,2" ring="Ring1.wav" group_id_name="Friend" default_photo="Config:cutom1.jpg"/> <contact display_name="Tom" office_number="2020" mobile_number="2021" other_number="2112" line="2" ring="Ring1.wav" group_id_name="Friend" default_photo="Config:cutom2.png"/>...
  • Page 388 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones During the auto provisioning process, the IP phone connects to the provisioning server “192.168.10.25”, and downloads the avatar file “photo1.tar”, icon file “photo2.tar” and the local contact file “contact.xml”. If you have configured to back up the local contacts to the server, the IP phone will download the Note contact file “<MAC>-contact.xml”...

  • Page 389: Configuring Local Directory

    Configuring Basic Features Configuring Local Directory Procedure Local directory be configured using the following methods. Specify the access URL of the local contact file. Central Provisioning <y0000000000xx>.cfg Parameter: (Configuration File) local_contact.data.url Add a new group and a contact to the local directory.
  • Page 390 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Select the desired ring tone from the pull-down list of Ring. Click Add to add the group. To add a contact to the local directory via web user interface: Click on Directory->Local Directory. In the Contacts block, enter the name and the office, mobile or other numbers in the corresponding fields.
  • Page 391 Configuring Basic Features If Auto is selected, the IP phone will use the default account when placing calls to the contact from the local directory. Click Add to add the contact. To add a group to the local directory via phone user interface: Press Menu->Directory->Local Directory.
  • Page 392 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Click Browse to locate a contact list file (the file format must be *.xml) from your local system. Click Import XML to import the contact list. The web user interface prompts "The original contact will be covered, continue?". Click OK to complete importing the contact list.

  • Page 393: Backing Up The Local Contacts

    Press the Save soft key to accept the change. Backing up the Local Contacts Yealink IP phones support storing all local contacts to a contact file named <MAC>- contact.xml. You can back up this file to the server, avoiding data loss. Once the contacts update, the IP phone will automatically upload this file to the provisioning server or a specific server.
  • Page 394 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones auto provisioning. The contact file is named after the MAC address of the IP phone. MAC address, a unique 12- digit serial number assigned to each phone, can be obtained from the bar code on the back of the IP phone.

  • Page 395: Live Dialpad

    Configuring Basic Features Permitted Parameters Default Values None static.auto_provision.local_contact.backup.path String Blank Description: Configures a path or URL for the IP phone to upload/download the <MAC>-contact.xml file. If it is left blank, the IP phone connects to the provisioning server URL, and uploads/downloads the contact file “<MAC>-contact.xml”.
  • Page 396 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones p=settings-preference&q=load Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default phone_setting.predial_autodial 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the live dialpad feature. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled If it is set to 1 (Enabled), the IP phone will automatically dial out the entered phone number on the dialing screen without pressing a send key.

  • Page 397: Speed Dial

    Configuring Basic Features Enter the desired delay time in the Inter Digit Time(1~14s) field. Click Confirm to accept the change. Speed Dial Speed dial allows users to speed up dialing the numbers frequently used or hard to remember using dedicated DSS keys. Procedure Speed dial key can be configured using the following methods.

  • Page 398: Speed Dial Key

    The digit 13 stands for the key type Speed Dial. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 399 The default value of the line key 1-16 is 15, and the default value of the line key 17-29 is 0. For SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G IP phones: The default value of the line key 1-16 is 15, and the default value of the line key 17-27 is 0.
  • Page 400 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default When X=5, the default value is 28 (History). When X=6, the default value is 61 (Directory). When X=7, the default value is 51 (Switch Account Up). When X=8, the default value is 52 (Switch Account Down).
  • Page 401 When X=9, the default value is 33 (Status). When X=13, the default value is 0 (NA). For ext keys: For SIP-T54S/T52S IP phones: When Y=1-60, the default value is 0 (NA). For SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S IP phones: When Y= 1 to 40, the default value is 0 (NA).
  • Page 402 Configures the desired line to apply the speed dial key. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 403 Configures the extension you want to dial out. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 404 (Optional.) Configures the label displayed on the LCD screen for each DSS key. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G)

  • Page 405: Call Waiting

    Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: Dsskey->Line Key->Short Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->DSS Keys->Line Key X->Short Label To configure a speed dial key via web user interface: Click on Dsskey->Line Key (or Programable Key). In the desired DSS key field, select Speed Dial from the pull-down list of Type. Enter the phone number or extension you want to dial out in the Value field.
  • Page 406 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones The new incoming call is presented to the user visually on the LCD screen. Call waiting tone allows the IP phone to play a short tone, to remind the user audibly of a new incoming call during conversation.
  • Page 407 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default a busy signal (configured by the parameter “features.normal_refuse_code”) while during a call. If it is set to 1 (Enabled), the LCD screen will present a new incoming call while during a call. In both cases, users can put an active call on hold to make outgoing calls. Web User Interface: Features->General Information->Call Waiting Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 408 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the call waiting off code to deactivate the server-side call waiting feature. The IP phone will send the call waiting off code to the server when you deactivate call waiting feature on the IP phone.

  • Page 409: Auto Redial

    Configuring Basic Features To configure call waiting and call waiting tone via phone user interface: Press Menu->Features->Call Waiting. Press , or the Switch soft key to select the desired value from the Call Waiting field. Press , or the Switch soft key to select the desired value from the Play Tone field.
  • Page 410 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default If it is set to 1 (Enabled), the IP phone will dial the previous dialed out number automatically when the dialed number is temporarily unavailable. Web User Interface: Features->General Information->Auto Redial Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->Others->Auto Redial->Auto Redial...

  • Page 411: Auto Answer

    Configuring Basic Features Enter the desired times in the Auto Redial Times (1~300) field. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure auto redial via phone user interface: Press Menu->Features->Others->Auto Redial. Press , or the Switch soft key to select the desired value from the Auto Redial field.
  • Page 412 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Procedure Auto answer can be configured using the following methods. Configure auto answer and auto answer mute for SIP account X. Parameter: account.X.auto_answer account.X.auto_answer_mute_enable <MAC>.cfg Configure auto answer and auto answer mute for PSTN account X.
  • Page 413 1-Enabled If it is set to 1 (Enabled), the IP phone can automatically answer an incoming call. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 414 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “account.X.auto_answer” is set to 1 (Enabled). It is not applicable to CP860 IP phones. Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None...
  • Page 415 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Enables or disables the auto answer mute feature for the IP phone. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled If it is set to 1 (Enabled), the IP phone will mute the microphone when an incoming call is automatically answered, and then the other party cannot hear you.
  • Page 416 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default If it is set to 1 (Enabled), the IP phone can automatically answer an incoming call. Note: It is only applicable to CP860 and CP920 IP phones. The IP phone cannot automatically answer the incoming call during a call even if auto answer is enabled.
  • Page 417 Configuring Basic Features Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Auto Answer. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure auto answer and auto answer mute via web user interface: Click on Account->Basic. Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Auto Answer.
  • Page 418 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Enter the desired time in the Auto Answer Delay(1~4s) field. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure auto answer tone via web user interface: Click on Features->General Information. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Enable Auto Answer Tone. Click Confirm to accept the change.

  • Page 419: Ip Direct Auto Answer

    Configuring Basic Features Press the Save soft key to accept the change. To configure auto answer and auto answer mute via phone user interface: Press Menu->Features->Auto Answer. Press the soft key to select Enabled from the Status field. Press the soft key to select Enabled from the Auto Answer Mute field.

  • Page 420: Allow Ip Call

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameter Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: Features->General Information->IP Direct Auto Answer Phone User Interface: None To configure IP direct auto answer via web user interface: Click on Features->General Information. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of IP Direct Auto Answer.

  • Page 421: Accept Sip Trust Server Only

    Configuring Basic Features res-general&q=load Details of Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default features.direct_ip_call_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables allow IP address call. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: If you want to receive an IP address call, make sure the value of the parameter “sip.trust_ctrl”...
  • Page 422 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones SIP server and outbound proxy server. It can prevent the phone receiving ghost calls from random numbers like 100, 1000, etc. To stop this from happening, you also need to disable allow IP call feature.

  • Page 423: Call Completion

    The caller subscribes for update notifications of the dialog event from the busy party. Example of a SUBSCRIBE message: SUBSCRIBE sip:1000@10.10.20.34:5060 SIP/2.0 Via: SIP/2.0/UDP 10.10.20.32:5060;branch=z9hG4bK2880274891 From: "10111" <sip:10111@10.2.1.48:5060>;tag=8643512 To: <sip:1000@10.2.1.48:5060>;tag=4025601441 Call-ID: 4_2103527761@10.10.20.32 CSeq: 2 SUBSCRIBE Contact: <sip:10111@10.10.20.32:5060> Accept: application/dialog-info+xml Max-Forwards: 70 User-Agent: Yealink SIP-T46G 28.81.0.25 Expires: 60 Event: dialog...
  • Page 424 Via: SIP/2.0/UDP 10.10.20.31:5060;branch=z9hG4bK1830418099 From: <sip:1000@10.2.1.48:5060>;tag=1032948194 To: "10111" <sip:10111@10.2.1.48:5060>;tag=722495580 Call-ID: 0_160090766@10.10.20.32 CSeq: 2 NOTIFY Contact: <sip:1000@10.10.20.31:5060> Content-Type: application/dialog-info+xml Max-Forwards: 70 User-Agent: Yealink SIP-T46G 28.81.0.25 Subscription-State: active;expires=60 Event: dialog Content-Length: <?xml version="1.0"?> <dialog-info xmlns="urn:ietf:params:xml:ns:dialog-info" version="1" state="full" entity="sip:1000@10.2.1.48:5060"> <dialog id="65626" call-id="0_3138198645@10.10.20.31" local-tag="2331766736" remote- tag="1786911541"...
  • Page 425 Configuring Basic Features Call-ID: 0_2584152566@10.10.20.32 CSeq: 5 NOTIFY Contact: <sip:1000@10.10.20.31:5060> Content-Type: application/dialog-info+xml Max-Forwards: 70 User-Agent: Yealink SIP-T46G 28.81.0.25 Subscription-State: active;expires=48 Event: dialog Content-Length: <?xml version="1.0"?> <dialog-info xmlns="urn:ietf:params:xml:ns:dialog-info" version="4" state="partial" entity="sip:1000@10.2.1.48:5060"> <dialog id="65644"> <state>terminated</state> </dialog> </dialog-info> Procedure Call completion can be configured using the following methods.

  • Page 426: Anonymous Call

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameter Permitted Values Default If it is set to 1 (Enabled), the caller is notified when the callee becomes available to receive a call. Web User Interface: Features->General Information->Call Completion Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->Others->Call Completion->Call Completion To configure call completion via web user interface:...
  • Page 427 Contact: <sip:1009@10.3.20.14:5060> Content-Type: application/sdp Allow: INVITE, INFO, PRACK, ACK, BYE, CANCEL, OPTIONS, NOTIFY, REGISTER, SUBSCRIBE, REFER, PUBLISH, UPDATE, MESSAGE Max-Forwards: 70 User-Agent: Yealink SIP-T46G 28.81.0.25 Allow-Events: talk,hold,conference,refer,check-sync P-Preferred-Identity: <sip:1009@10.2.1.48> Privacy: id Content-Length: 302 The anonymous call on code and anonymous call off code configured on IP phones are used to activate/deactivate the server-side anonymous call feature.
  • Page 428 If it is set to 1 (On), the IP phone will block its identity from showing up to the callee when placing a call. The callee’s phone LCD screen presents anonymous instead of the caller’s identity. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 429 Configures the anonymous call on code to activate the server-side anonymous call feature for account X. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 430 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default X is equal to 1 (for SIP-T19(P) E2/CP860/CP920) Example: account.1.anonymous_call_offcode = *73 Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “account.X.send_anonymous_code” is set to 0 (Off Code). Web User Interface: Account->Basic->Send Anonymous Code->Off Code Phone User Interface:...

  • Page 431: Anonymous Call Rejection

    CSeq: 1 INVITE Allow: INVITE, INFO, PRACK, ACK, BYE, CANCEL, OPTIONS, NOTIFY, REGISTER, SUBSCRIBE, REFER, PUBLISH, UPDATE, MESSAGE User-Agent: Yealink SIP-T46G 28.81.0.25 Allow-Events: talk, hold, conference, refer, check-sync Content-Length: 0 The anonymous call rejection on code and anonymous call rejection off code configured on IP phones are used to activate/deactivate the server-side anonymous call rejection feature.
  • Page 432 If it is set to 1 (On), the IP phone will automatically reject incoming calls from users enabled anonymous call feature. The anonymous user’s phone LCD screen presents “Anonymity Disallowed”. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 433 Configures the anonymous call rejection on code to activate the server-side anonymous call rejection feature for account X. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 434 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) X is equal to 1 (for SIP-T19(P) E2/CP860/CP920) Example: account.1.anonymous_reject_offcode = *75 Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “account.X.send_anonymous_rejection_code”...

  • Page 435: Do Not Disturb (Dnd)

    Configuring Basic Features Press to scroll to the Send Rejection Code field. (Optional.) Press to select the desired value from the Send Rejection Code field. (Optional.) Enter the anonymous call rejection on code and off code respectively in the On Code and Off Code field.
  • Page 436 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones DND Large Icon This feature allows the IP phones to display a large DND icon on the idle screen. It helps users to clearly view DND is activated. Procedure DND can be configured using the following methods. Configure DND in the custom mode.
  • Page 437 Configuring Basic Features Specify the return code and the reason of the SIP response message when DND is activated. Parameter: features.dnd_refuse_code Configure large DND icon feature. Parameter: features.dnd.large_icon.enable Assign a DND key. Parameters: linekey.X.type/ programablekey.X.type/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.type linekey.X.label/ programablekey.X.label/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.label linekey.X.shortlabel Configure DND.
  • Page 438 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default features.dnd.allow 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the DND feature. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled If it is set to 0 (Disabled), DND cannot be activated and users are not allowed to configure DND on the phone.
  • Page 439 Configuring Basic Features If it is set to 1 (On), the IP phone will reject incoming calls on all accounts. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “features.dnd.allow” is set to 1 (Enabled) (except CP860 IP phones) and value of the parameter “features.dnd_mode” is set to 0 (Phone) (except SIP-T19(P) E2/CP860/CP920 IP phones).
  • Page 440 1-On If it is set to 1 (On), the IP phone will reject incoming calls on account X. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 441 The IP phone will send the DND off code to the server when you deactivate DND feature for account X on the IP phone. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S)
  • Page 442 If it is set to 486 (Busy Here), the caller’s phone LCD screen will display the reason “Busy Here” when the callee enables DND. Note: For Yealink IP phones (except CP860), it works only if the value of the parameter “features.dnd.allow” is set to 1 (Enabled).
  • Page 443 Configuring Basic Features Note: For Yealink IP phones (except CP860), it works only if the value of the parameter “features.dnd.allow” is set to 1 (Enabled). Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None DND Key DND key can be configured only if the DND feature is enabled. For more information on how...
  • Page 444 The default value of the line key 1-16 is 15, and the default value of the line key 17-29 is 0. For SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G IP phones: The default value of the line key 1-16 is 15, and the default value of the line key 17-27 is 0.
  • Page 445 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default When X=14, the default value is 2 (Forward). For SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S/T40P/T40G IP phones: When X=1, the default value is 28 (History). When X=2, the default value is 61 (Directory). When X=3, the default value is 5 (DND). When X=4, the default value is 30 (Menu).
  • Page 446 When X=9, the default value is 33 (Status). When X=13, the default value is 0 (NA). For ext keys: For SIP-T54S/T52S IP phones: When Y=1-60, the default value is 0 (NA). For SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S IP phones: When Y= 1 to 40, the default value is 0 (NA).
  • Page 447 (Optional.) Configures the label displayed on the LCD screen for each DSS key. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 448 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Dsskey->Line Key->Short Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->DSS Keys->Line Key X->Short Label To configure a DND key via web user interface: Click on Dsskey->Line Key (or Programable Key). In the desired DSS key field, select DND from the pull-down list of Type.
  • Page 449 Configuring Basic Features (Optional.) Enter the DND off code in the Off Code field. If you mark the Custom radio box: Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account. Mark the desired radio box in the DND Status field. (Optional.) Enter the DND on code in the On Code field.
  • Page 450 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones (Optional.) Enter the DND off code in the Off Code field. Click Confirm to accept the change. To specify the authorized numbers when DND is activated via web user interface: Click on Features->General Information.
  • Page 451 Configuring Basic Features Multiple numbers are separated by commas. Click Confirm to accept the change. To specify the return code and the reason when DND is activated via web user interface: Click on Features->General Information. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Return Code When DND. Click Confirm to accept the change.

  • Page 452: Busy Tone Delay

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Press , or the Switch soft key to select Key Event from the Type field. Press , or the Switch soft key to select DND from the Key Type field. (Optional.) Enter the string that will appear on the LCD screen in the Label field.
  • Page 453 Configuring Basic Features Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default features.busy_tone_delay 0, 3 or 5 Description: Configures the duration time (in seconds) for the busy tone. When one party releases the call, a busy tone is audible to the other party indicating that the call connection breaks.

  • Page 454: Return Code When Refuse

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Return Code When Refuse Return code when refuse defines the return code and reason of the SIP response message for the refused call. The caller’s phone LCD screen displays the reason according to the received return code.
  • Page 455 Configuring Basic Features Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default features.normal_refuse_code 404, 480, 486 or 603 Description: Configures a return code and reason of SIP response messages when the IP phone rejects an incoming call. A specific reason is displayed on the caller’s phone LCD screen. 404-Not Found 480-Temporarily Unavailable 486-Busy Here...

  • Page 456: Early Media

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Early Media Early media refers to media (e.g., audio and video) played to the caller before a SIP call is actually established. Current implementation supports early media through the 183 message. When the caller receives a 183 message with SDP before the call is established, a media channel is established.

  • Page 457: Use Outbound Proxy In Dialog

    Configuring Basic Features Parameter Permitted Values Default None To configure 180 ring workaround via web user interface: 1. Click on Features->General Information. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of 180 Ring Workaround. Click Confirm to accept the change. Use Outbound Proxy in Dialog An outbound proxy server can receive all initiating request messages and route them to the designated destination.
  • Page 458 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Procedure Use outbound proxy in dialog can be configured using the following methods. Specify whether to use outbound proxy in a dialog. Central Provisioning <y0000000000xx>.cfg Parameter: (Configuration File) sip.use_out_bound_in_dialog Specify whether to use outbound proxy in a dialog.

  • Page 459: Sip Session Timer

    Configuring Basic Features Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Use Outbound Proxy In Dialog. Click Confirm to accept the change. SIP Session Timer SIP session timers T1, T2 and T4 are SIP transaction layer timers defined in 3261.
  • Page 460 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Procedure SIP session timer can be configured using the following methods. Configure SIP session timer. Parameters: Central Provisioning <y0000000000xx>.cfg sip.timer_t1 (Configuration File) sip.timer_t2 sip.timer_t4 Configure SIP session timer. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =settings-sip&q=load...

  • Page 461: Session Timer

    Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the SIP session timer of T4 (in seconds). T4 represents the maximum duration a message will remain in the network. Web User Interface: Settings->SIP->SIP Session Timer T4 (2.5~60s) Phone User Interface: None To configure session timer via web user interface: Click on Settings->SIP.
  • Page 462 Via: SIP/2.0/UDP 10.10.20.32:5060;branch=z9hG4bK2104991394 From: "10111" <sip:10111@10.2.1.48:5060>;tag=2170397024 To: <sip:1058@10.2.1.48:5060>;tag=200382096 Call-ID: 4_1556494084@10.10.20.32 CSeq: 2 UPDATE Contact: <sip:10111@10.10.20.32:5060> Max-Forwards: 70 User-Agent: Yealink SIP-T46G 28.81.0.25 Session-Expires: 90;refresher=uac Supported: timer Content-Length: 0 Procedure Session timer can be configured using the following methods. Configure session timer.
  • Page 463 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2)
  • Page 464 Permitted Values Default 0-UAC 1-UAS X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) X is equal to 1 (for SIP-T19(P) E2/CP860/CP920) Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “account.X.session_timer.enable”...

  • Page 465: Call Hold

    Configuring Basic Features Select the desired refresher from the pull-down list of Session Refresher. Click Confirm to accept the change. Call Hold Call hold provides a service of placing an active call on hold. The purpose of call hold is to pause activity on the existing call so that you can use the phone for another task (e.g., to place or receive another call).
  • Page 466 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Procedure Call hold can be configured using the following methods. Configure the call hold tone and call hold tone delay. Parameters: features.play_hold_tone.enable features.play_hold_tone.delay <y0000000000xx>.cfg Specify whether RFC 2543 (c=0.0.0.0) outgoing hold signaling Central Provisioning is used.
  • Page 467 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default None features.play_hold_tone.delay Integer from 3 to 3600 Description: Configures the interval (in seconds) at which the IP phone play a warning tone when there is a call on hold. If it is set to 30 (30s), the IP phone will play a warning tone every 30 seconds when there is a call on hold.
  • Page 468 If it is set to 1 (Enabled), SDP media direction attribute “a=inactive” is used when placing a call on hold. RTP packets will not be sent or received. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S)

  • Page 469: Music On Hold (Moh)

    Configuring Basic Features Select the desired value from the pull-down list of RFC 2543 Hold. Click Confirm to accept the change. Music on Hold (MoH) Music on Hold (MoH) is the business practice of playing recorded music to fill the silence that would be heard by the party who has been placed on hold.
  • Page 470 URI points to a Music On Hold (MoH) server. Examples for valid values: <10.1.3.165>, 10.1.3.165, sip:moh@sip.com, <sip:moh@sip.com>, <yealink.com> or yealink.com. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G)

  • Page 471: Call Forward

    Permitted Values Default 1-Calling the Music On Hold server after holding X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G)
  • Page 472 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones incoming INVITE message by responding with a 302 Moved Temporarily message, which contains a Contact header with a new URI that should be tried. Three types of call forward: Always Forward -- Forward the incoming call immediately. ...
  • Page 473 Configuring Basic Features Procedure Call forward can be configured using the following methods. Configure call forward in custom mode. Parameters: account.X.always_fwd.enable account.X.always_fwd.target account.X.always_fwd.on_code account.X.always_fwd.off_code account.X.busy_fwd.enable <MAC>.cfg account.X.busy_fwd.target account.X.busy_fwd.on_code account.X.busy_fwd.off_code account.X.timeout_fwd.enable account.X.timeout_fwd.target account.X.timeout_fwd.timeout Central Provisioning account.X.timeout_fwd.on_code (Configuration File) account.X.timeout_fwd.off_code Configure the call forward feature. Parameter: features.fwd.allow Specify the authorized numbers...
  • Page 474 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Configure call forward in phone mode. Parameters: forward.always.enable forward.always.target forward.always.on_code forward.always.off_code forward.busy.enable forward.busy.target forward.busy.on_code forward.busy.off_code forward.no_answer.enable forward.no_answer.target forward.no_answer.timeout forward.no_answer.on_code forward.no_answer.off_code Configure diversion/history-info feature. Parameter: features.fwd_diversion_enable Configure forward international. Parameter: forward.international.enable Specify the authorized numbers when call forward is activated.
  • Page 475 Configuring Basic Features Configure forward international. Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default features.fwd.allow 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the call forward feature. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled If it is set to 0 (Disabled), call forward feature cannot be activated and users are not allowed to configure call forward feature on the phone.
  • Page 476 If it is set to 1 (On), incoming calls to the account X are forwarded to the destination number (configured by the parameter “account.X.always_fwd.target”) immediately. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S)
  • Page 477 (configured by the parameter “account.X.always_fwd.target”) to the server when you activate always forward feature for account X on the IP phone. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 478 If it is set to 1 (On), incoming calls to the account X are forwarded to the destination number (configured by the parameter “account.X.busy_fwd.target”) when the callee is busy. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S)
  • Page 479 (configured by the parameter “account.X.busy_fwd.target”) to the server when you activate busy forward feature for account X on the IP phone. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 480 The IP phone will send the busy forward off code to the server when you deactivate busy forward feature for account X on the IP phone. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S)
  • Page 481 Description: Configures the destination number of the no answer forward for account X. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G)
  • Page 482 (configured by the parameter “account.X.timeout_fwd.target”) to the server when you activate no answer forward feature for account X on the IP phone. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 483 Enables or disables the incoming calls from some authorized numbers not to be forwarded when the call forward feature is activated. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: For Yealink IP phones (except CP860), it works only if the value of the parameter “features.fwd.allow” is set to 1 (Enabled). Web User Interface: Features->Forward&DND->Forward->Forward Emergency...
  • Page 484 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Features->Forward&DND->Forward->Forward Authorized Numbers Phone User Interface: None forward.always.enable 0 or 1 Description: Triggers the always forward feature to on or off for the IP phone. 0-Off 1-On If it is set to 1 (On), incoming calls are forwarded to the destination number (configured by the parameter “forward.always.target”) immediately.
  • Page 485 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default The IP phone will send the always forward on code and the pre-configured destination number (configured by the parameter “forward.always.target”) to the server when you activate always forward feature on the IP phone. Example: forward.always.on_code = *72 Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “features.fwd.allow”...
  • Page 486 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default (except CP860 IP phones) and value of the parameter “features.fwd_mode” is set to 0 (Phone) (except SIP-T19(P) E2/CP860/CP920 IP phones). Web User Interface: Features->Forward&DND->Forward->Busy Forward->On/Off Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->Call Forward->Busy Forward->Busy Forward String within 32 forward.busy.target...
  • Page 487 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default String within 32 forward.busy.off_code Blank characters Description: Configures the busy forward off code to deactivate the server-side busy forward feature. The IP phone will send the busy forward off code to the server when you deactivate busy forward feature on the IP phone.
  • Page 488 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default forward.no_answer.target = 3603 Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “features.fwd.allow” is set to 1 (Enabled) (except CP860 IP phones) and value of the parameter “features.fwd_mode” is set to 0 (Phone) (except SIP-T19(P) E2/CP860/CP920 IP phones).
  • Page 489 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->Call Forward->No Answer Forward->On Code String within 32 forward.no_answer.off_code Blank characters Description: Configures the no answer forward off code to deactivate the server-side no answer forward feature. The IP phone will send the no answer forward off code to the server when you deactivate no answer forward feature on the IP phone.
  • Page 490 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default 1-Enabled Note: For Yealink IP phones (except CP860), it works only if the value of the parameter “features.fwd.allow” is set to 1 (Enabled). Web User Interface: Features->General Information->Fwd International Phone User Interface: Menu->Advanced (default password: admin)->FWD International->FWD International...
  • Page 491 Configuring Basic Features Select the ring time to wait before forwarding from the pull-down list of After Ring Time(0~120s) (only for the no answer forward). If you mark the Custom radio box: Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account. Mark the desired radio box in the Always/Busy/No Answer Forward field.
  • Page 492 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Diversion/History-Info. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure forward international via web user interface: Click on Features->General Information. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Fwd International. Click Confirm to accept the change.
  • Page 493 Configuring Basic Features Press , or the Switch soft key to select the desired value from the Always Forward field. Enter the destination number you want to forward all incoming calls to in the Forward to field. (Optional.) Enter the always forward on code and off code respectively in the On Code and Off Code field.
  • Page 494 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Press the All Lines soft key. The LCD screen prompts “Copy to all lines?”. Press the OK soft key to accept the change. If you select Busy Forward, you can configure it for a specific account. Press , or the Switch soft key to select the desired value from the Busy Forward field.

  • Page 495: Call Transfer

    Configuring Basic Features Call Transfer Call transfer enables IP phones to transfer an existing call to a third party. For example, if party A is in an active call with party B, party A can transfer this call to party C (the third party). Then, party B will begin a new call with party C and party A will disconnect.
  • Page 496 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default transfer.blind_tran_on_hook_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to complete the blind transfer through on-hook besides pressing the Trans/Transfer soft key or TRAN/TRANSFER key. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: Blind transfer means transfer a call directly to another party without consulting.

  • Page 497: Local Conference

    Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Features->Transfer->Semi-Attended Transfer Phone User Interface: None To configure call transfer via web user interface: Click on Features->Transfer. Select the desired values from the pull-down lists of Semi-Attended Transfer, Blind Transfer on Hook and Attended Transfer on Hook. Click Confirm to accept the change.
  • Page 498 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Procedure Local conference can be configured using the configuration files. Configure local conference. Parameters: Central Provisioning <y0000000000xx>.cfg features.conference.local.enable (Configuration File) features.local_conf.combine_with_o ne_press.enable Details of Configuration Parameter: Parameters Permitted Values Default features.conference.local.enable 0 or 1 Description:...

  • Page 499: Network Conference

    Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Conf soft key, again to set up a conference after the invitee answers the call. Note: It is only applicable to CP920 IP phones. Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None To configure the local conference via web user interface: Click on Account->Advanced.
  • Page 500 If it is set to 0 (Local Conference), conferences are set up on the IP phone locally. If it is set to 2 (Network Conference), conferences are set up by the server. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S)
  • Page 501 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2)

  • Page 502: Transfer On Conference Hang Up

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Transfer on Conference Hang Up For a local conference, all parties drop the call when the conference initiator drops the conference call. Transfer on conference hang up feature allows the other two parties to remain connected when the conference initiator drops the conference call.

  • Page 503: Feature Key Synchronization

    Configuring Basic Features Parameter Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: Features->Transfer->Transfer on Conference Hang up Phone User Interface: None To configure transfer on conference hang up via web user interface: Click on Features->Transfer. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Transfer on Conference Hang up. Click Confirm to accept the change.
  • Page 504 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Configure feature key synchronization. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet? p=features-general&q=load Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default bw.feature_key_sync 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables feature key synchronization. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Web User Interface:...

  • Page 505: Transfer Mode Via Dsskey

    Configuring Basic Features Transfer Mode via Dsskey Transfer mode via dsskey enables IP phones to handle the current call differently via the DSS key. IP phones support three transfer modes: New Call, Blind Transfer and Attended Transfer. For more information on Blind Transfer and Attended Transfer, refer to Call Transfer on page 469.

  • Page 506: Allow Trans Exist Call

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameter Permitted Values Default 2-Blind Transfer Note: To use this feature, you need to configure the DSS key as a speed dial, transfer or BLF/BLF List in advance. It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2/CP860/CP920 IP phones. Web User Interface: Features->Transfer->Transfer Mode via Dsskey Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 507 If it is set to 0 (Disabled), the user can transfer the active call to a new call during multiple calls when the user presses the Trans/Transfer soft key or TRAN/TRANSFER key. Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G/CP920 IP phones. Allow trans exist call is enabled on CP920 IP phones by default. You are not allowed to configure this parameter for these IP phones.

  • Page 508: Directed Call Pickup

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameter Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: None To configure allow trans exist call via web user interface: Click on Features->General Information. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Allow Trans Exist Call. Click Confirm to accept the change.
  • Page 509 Configuring Basic Features the More soft key to see the DPickup soft key). As shown below: It is recommended not to configure the directed call pickup key and the DPickup soft key Note simultaneously. If you do, the directed pickup key will not be used correctly. Procedure Directed call pickup can be configured using the following methods.
  • Page 510 Description: Configures the directed call pickup code for account X. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G)
  • Page 511 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default None features.pickup.direct_pickup_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to display the DPickup soft key when the IP phone is on the dialing screen. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Web User Interface: Features->Call Pickup->Directed Call Pickup Phone User Interface: None features.pickup.direct_pickup_code...
  • Page 512 The digit 9 stands for the key type Direct Pickup. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 513 For SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2 IP phones: The default value is 15. For programable keys: For SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S IP phones: When X=1, the default value is 28 (History). When X=2, the default value is 61 (Directory). When X=3, the default value is 5 (DND).
  • Page 514 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default When X=13, the default value is 0 (NA). For SIP-T29G/T27P/T27G IP phones: When X=1, the default value is 28 (History). When X=2, the default value is 61 (Directory). When X=3, the default value is 5 (DND).
  • Page 515 Description: Configures the desired line to apply the directed call pickup key. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S)
  • Page 516 For SIP-T29G/T27P/T27G: X ranges from 1 to 6, Y ranges from 1 to 20, 22 to 40 (Ext key 21 cannot be configured). Permitted Values: 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 517 Configures the directed call pickup feature code followed by the monitored extension. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 518 Default For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G)
  • Page 519 Configuring Basic Features Select the desired line from the pull-down list of Line. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure the directed call pickup code on a per-line basis via web user interface: Click on Account->Advanced. Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account. Enter the directed call pickup code in the Directed Call Pickup Code field.

  • Page 520: Group Call Pickup

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure a directed pickup key via phone user interface: Press Menu->Features->DSS Keys. Select the desired DSS key. Press , or the Switch soft key to select Key Event from the Type field. Press , or the Switch soft key to select DPickup from the Key Type field.
  • Page 521 Configuring Basic Features Procedure Group call pickup can be configured using the following methods. Configure the group call pickup code on a per-line basis. Parameter: account.X.group_pickup_code <MAC>.cfg Configure group call pickup features on a phone basis. Parameters: features.pickup.group_pickup_enable features.pickup.group_pickup_code Central Provisioning Assign a group call pickup key.
  • Page 522 Blank Description: Configures the group pickup code for account X. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G)
  • Page 523 The digit 23 stands for the key type Group Pickup. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 524 The default value of the line key 1-16 is 15, and the default value of the line key 17-29 is 0. For SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G IP phones: The default value of the line key 1-16 is 15, and the default value of the line key 17-27 is 0.
  • Page 525 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default When X=5, the default value is 28 (History). When X=6, the default value is 61 (Directory). When X=7, the default value is 51 (Switch Account Up). When X=8, the default value is 52 (Switch Account Down). When X=9, the default value is 33 (Status).
  • Page 526 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default When X=14, the default value is 2 (Forward). For SIP-T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2 IP phones: When X=1, the default value is 28 (History). When X=2, the default value is 61 (Directory). When X=3, the default value is 5 (DND).
  • Page 527 Configures the desired line to apply the group call pickup key. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 528 Configures the group call pickup feature code. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 529 (Optional.) Configures the label displayed on the LCD screen for each DSS key. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 530 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Dsskey->Line Key/Programable Key->Label Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->DSS Keys->Line Key X->Label linekey.X.shortlabel String within 99 Blank characters (X ranges from 1 to 21) Description: (Optional.) Configures the short label displayed on the LCD screen for line key. Note: It is only applicable to SIP-T52S IP phones.
  • Page 531 Configuring Basic Features Enter the group call pickup code in the Group Call Pickup Code field. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure group call pickup feature on a phone basis via web user interface: Click on Features->Call Pickup. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Group Call Pickup.

  • Page 532: Dialog Info Call Pickup

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones field. (Optional.) Enter the string that will appear on the LCD screen in the Label field. Enter the group call pickup code in the Value field. Press the Save soft key to accept the change. Dialog Info Call Pickup Call pickup is implemented through SIP signals on some specific servers.
  • Page 533 0-Disabled 1-Enabled If it is set to 1 (Enabled), call pickup is implemented through SIP signals. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 534 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameter Permitted Values Default X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2/CP860/CP920 IP phones. Web User Interface: Account->Advanced->Dialog Info Call Pickup Phone User Interface: None To configure dialog info call pickup via web user interface:...

  • Page 535: Recent Call In Dialing

    Configuring Basic Features Recent Call In Dialing Recent call in dialing feature allows users to view the placed calls list when the phone is on the dialing screen (lifts the handset, presses the Speakerphone key or desired line key). Users can select to place a call from the placed calls list.

  • Page 536: Recall

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameter Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: None To configure recent call in dialing via web user interface: Click on Directory->Setting. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Recent Call In Dialing. Click Confirm to accept the change.
  • Page 537 The digit 7 stands for the key type ReCall. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 538 The default value of the line key 1-16 is 15, and the default value of the line key 17-29 is 0. For SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G IP phones: The default value of the line key 1-16 is 15, and the default value of the line key 17-27 is 0.
  • Page 539 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default When X=12, the default value is 0 (NA). When X=13, the default value is 0 (NA). When X=14, the default value is 2 (Forward). For SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S/T40P/T40G IP phones: When X=1, the default value is 28 (History). When X=2, the default value is 61 (Directory).
  • Page 540 When X=9, the default value is 33 (Status). When X=13, the default value is 0 (NA). For ext keys: For SIP-T54S/T52S IP phones: When Y=1-60, the default value is 0 (NA). For SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S IP phones: When Y= 1 to 40, the default value is 0 (NA).
  • Page 541 (Optional.) Configures the label displayed on the LCD screen for each DSS key. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G)

  • Page 542: Call Number Filter

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Note: It is only applicable to SIP-T52S IP phones. Web User Interface: Dsskey->Line Key->Short Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->DSS Keys->Line Key X->Short Label To configure a recall key via web user interface: Click on Dsskey->Line Key (or Programable Key).
  • Page 543 Configuring Basic Features features.call_num_filter Configure the characters the IP phone filters when dialing. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=fea tures-general&q=load Details of Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default String within 99 characters ,-( ) features.call_num_filter Description: Configures the characters the IP phone filters when dialing. If the dialed number contains configured characters, the IP phone will automatically filter these characters when dialing.

  • Page 544: Call Park

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Enter the desired characters in the Call Number Filter field. Click Confirm to accept the change. Call Park Call park allows users to park a call on a special extension and then retrieve it from another phone (for example, a phone in another office or conference room).
  • Page 545 Configuring Basic Features Procedure Call park can be configured using the following methods. Configure call park feature. Parameters: features.call_park.park_mode features.call_park.enable features.call_park.park_code features.call_park.park_retrieve_code features.call_park.direct_send.enable Assign a call park key. Assign a retrieve park key. Central Provisioning <y0000000000xx>.cfg Parameters: (Configuration File) linekey.X.type/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.type linekey.X.line/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.line...
  • Page 546 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default 1 or 2 features.call_park.park_mode Description: Configures the call park mode. 1-FAC 2-Transfer Web User Interface: Features->Call Pickup->Call Park Mode Phone User Interface: None features.call_park.enable 0 or 1...
  • Page 547 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default features.call_park.park_retrieve_code String within 32 characters Blank Description: Configures the park retrieve code for the Retrieve soft key. This park retrieve code will also apply to the retrieve park key. Example: features.call_park.park_retrieve_code = *88 Web User Interface: Features->Call Pickup->Park Retrieve Code Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 548 The digit 10 stands for the key type Call Park. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 549 Configures the desired line to apply the call park key. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 550 Configures the call park code. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 551 (Optional.) Configures the label displayed on the LCD screen for each DSS key. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 552 The digit 56 stands for the key type Retrieve Park. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 553 Configures the desired line to apply the retrieve park key. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 554 Configures the park retrieve code. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 555 (Optional.) Configures the label displayed on the LCD screen for each DSS key. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 556 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Menu->Features->DSS Keys->Line Key X->Label linekey.X.shortlabel String within 99 Blank (X ranges from 1 to 21) characters Description: (Optional.) Configures the short label displayed on the LCD screen for line key. Note: It is only applicable to SIP-T52S IP phones.
  • Page 557 Configuring Basic Features Select the desired line from the pull-down list of Line. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure a retrieve park key via web user interface: Click on Dsskey->Line Key. In the desired DSS key field, select Retrieve Park from the pull-down list of Type. Enter the park retrieve code in the Value field.

  • Page 558: Calling Line Identification Presentation (Clip)

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Press , or the Switch soft key to select the desired account from the Account ID field. (Optional.) Enter the string that will appear on the LCD screen in the Label field. Enter the retrieve park code in the Value field.
  • Page 559 Configuring Basic Features If there is not any Privacy: id header in the INVITE request, the IP phone checks and presents the caller identification from the P-Preferred-Identity header. If there is not P-Preferred-Identity header in the INVITE request, the IP phone checks and presents the caller identification from the P-Asserted-Identity header.
  • Page 560 FROM header. Calling and Connected For more information on calling line identification presentation, refer to Line Identification Presentation on Yealink IP Phones Procedure CLIP can be configured using the following methods. Configure the presentation of the caller identity.
  • Page 561 If it is set to 6 (PREFERENCE), the IP phone uses the custom priority order for the sources of caller identity information (configured by the parameter “sip.cid_source.preference”). X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S)
  • Page 562 Configures the priority order for the sources of caller identity information. The headers can be in any order. Note: Yealink IP phones support deriving caller identity from the following SIP headers: From, P-Asserted-Identity (PAI), P-Preferred-Identity and Remote-Party-ID (RPID). It works only if the value of the parameter “account.X.cid_source”...

  • Page 563: Connected Line Identification Presentation (Colp)

    Configuring Basic Features Permitted Parameters Default Values None Phone User Interface: None To configure the presentation of the caller identity via web user interface: Click on Account->Advanced. Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Caller ID Source. Click Confirm to accept the change.
  • Page 564 Connected Line Identification source = Dialed digits Yealink IP phones present the connected line identification according to the dialed digits. Connected Line Identification source = RFC4916 Yealink IP phones support to present the connected line identification from UPDATE message following the 4916.
  • Page 565 Supported header. The caller then receives an UPDATE message from the callee, and displays the identity in the “From” header. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S)

  • Page 566: Mute

    None Mute Yealink IP phones support muting the microphone of the active audio device (handset, headset or speakerphone) during an active call or while dialing. You can activate the mute feature by pressing the MUTE key. Normally, mute feature is automatically deactivated when the active call ends.
  • Page 567 If it is set to 1 (Enabled), you are allowed to mute an active call, or activate the mute feature on the pre-dialing/dialing/calling/ringing screen (Mute the microphone on the calling screen is only applicable to the SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G IP phones). Note: For SIP-T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2 IP phones, you are allowed to activate the mute feature on the pre-dialing/dialing/calling/ringing screen only if the value of the parameter “features.keep_mute.enable”...

  • Page 568: Keep Mute

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Keep Mute Keep mute, also known as persistent mute, allows you to keep the mute state of your phone persist across calls. Once the keep mute feature is enabled, you can activate the mute feature by pressing the MUTE key in an idle state or any other states (for SIP-T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2 IP phones, you can only activate the mute feature by pressing the Cancel key on idle/pre- dialing/dialing/ringing/calling/talking screen).

  • Page 569: Intercom

    Configuring Basic Features Parameter Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None Intercom Intercom allows establishing an audio conversation directly. The IP phone can answer intercom calls automatically. This feature depends on support from a SIP server. Outgoing Intercom Calls Intercom is a useful feature in office environments to quickly connect with an operator or secretary.
  • Page 570 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Procedure Intercom can be configured using the following methods. Configure the intercom subscription. Parameters: features.intercom.led.enable features.intercom.subscribe.enable Assign an intercom key. Parameters: linekey.X.type/ programablekey.X.type/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.type Central Provisioning <y0000000000xx>. linekey.X.line/ programablekey.X.line/ (Configuration File) expansion_module.X.key.Y.line linekey.X.value/ programablekey.X.value/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.value...

  • Page 571: Intercom Key

    Configures a DSS key as an intercom key. The digit 14 stands for the key type Intercom. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S)
  • Page 572 X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) For programable keys: X=1-10, 12-14 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S) X=1-10, 13 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S/T40P/T40G) X=1-14 (for SIP-T29G/T27P/T27G) X=1-10, 14 (for SIP-T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2)
  • Page 573 Parameters Permitted Values Default For programable keys: For SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S IP phones: When X=1, the default value is 28 (History). When X=2, the default value is 61 (Directory). When X=3, the default value is 5 (DND). When X=4, the default value is 30 (Menu).
  • Page 574 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default When X=8, the default value is 52 (Switch Account Down). When X=9, the default value is 33 (Status). When X=10, the default value is 0 (NA). When X=11, the default value is 0 (NA).
  • Page 575 Configures the desired line to apply the intercom key. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 576 Configures the intercom number. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G)
  • Page 577 Configures the pickup code for intercom feature. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 578 (Optional.) Configures the label displayed on the LCD screen for each DSS key. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 579 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default X ranges from 1 to 6, Y ranges from 1 to 20, 22 to 40 (Ext key 21 cannot be configured). Web User Interface: Dsskey->Line Key/Programable Key->Label Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->DSS Keys->Line Key X->Label linekey.X.shortlabel String within 99 Blank...

  • Page 580: Incoming Intercom Calls

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones (Optional.) Enter the string that will appear on the LCD screen in the Label field. Enter the remote extension number in the Value field. (Optional.) Enter the directed call pickup code in the Extension field. This field appears only if intercom subscription feature is enabled.
  • Page 581 Configuring Basic Features Specify the channel mode when an incoming intercom call is answered. Parameter: features.intercom.headset_prior.enable Configure incoming intercom call feature. Web User Interface Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=fe atures-intercom&q=load Configure incoming intercom call Phone User Interface feature. Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default...
  • Page 582 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default (Enabled). Web User Interface: Features->Intercom->Intercom Mute Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->Intercom->Intercom Mute features.intercom.tone 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to play a warning tone when answering an intercom call. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “features.intercom.allow”...

  • Page 583: Call Timeout

    Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the channel mode when an incoming intercom call is answered. 0-Speaker Mode 1-Headset Mode Note: If you want to use a headset, physically connect your headset and activate the headset mode for use. It is not applicable to CP860/CP920 IP phones. Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface:...

  • Page 584: Ringing Timeout

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Procedure Call timeout can only be configured using the configuration files. Configure the duration time in the ringback state. Central Provisioning <y0000000000xx>.cfg Parameter: (Configuration File) phone_setting.ringback_timeout Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default...

  • Page 585: Send User=Phone

    Via: SIP/2.0/UDP 10.3.20.6:5060;branch=z9hG4bK2475812834 From: "1010" <sip:1010@10.2.1.48:5060>;tag=3747068208 To: <sip:101@10.2.1.48:5060;user=phone> Call-ID: 0_4008470062@10.3.20.6 CSeq: 1 INVITE Contact: <sip:1010@10.3.20.6:5060> Content-Type: application/sdp Allow: INVITE, INFO, PRACK, ACK, BYE, CANCEL, OPTIONS, NOTIFY, REGISTER, SUBSCRIBE, REFER, PUBLISH, UPDATE, MESSAGE Max-Forwards: 70 User-Agent: Yealink SIP-T46G 28.81.0.25 Allow-Events: talk,hold,conference,refer,check-sync Content-Length: 300...
  • Page 586 Enables or disables the IP phone to add “user=phone” to the SIP header of the INVITE message for account X. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G)

  • Page 587: Sip Send Mac

    From: "11" <sip:11@10.2.1.48:5060>;tag=2788360609 To: "11" <sip:11@10.2.1.48:5060> Call-ID: 1_1863786852@10.3.20.14 CSeq: 2 REGISTER Contact: <sip:11@10.3.20.14:5060;line=cc75882e976e208> Allow: INVITE, INFO, PRACK, ACK, BYE, CANCEL, OPTIONS, NOTIFY, REGISTER, SUBSCRIBE, REFER, PUBLISH, UPDATE, MESSAGE Max-Forwards: 70 User-Agent: Yealink SIP-T46G 28.81.0.25 Expires: 0 Allow-Events: talk,hold,conference,refer,check-sync Mac: 00:15:65:74:b1:50 Content-Length: 0...
  • Page 588 Enables or disables the IP phone to add MAC address to the SIP header of the REGISTER message for account X. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G)

  • Page 589: Sip Send Line

    “Line:<linenumber>”(e.g., Line: 1) to the SIP header of the REGISTER message. The line number is a number between 0 and 15. The following table lists line number values for each phone model. Phone Model Line Number Description SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/ 0~15 0~15 stand for line1~line16 T29G SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S 0~11...
  • Page 590 Enables or disables the IP phone to add line number to the SIP header of the REGISTER message for account X. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G)

  • Page 591: Reserve # In User Name

    Configuring Basic Features Parameter Permitted Values Default Account->Advanced->SIP Send Line Phone User Interface: None To configure SIP send Line feature via web user interface: Click on Account->Advanced. Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of SIP Send Line. Click Confirm to accept the change.
  • Page 592 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Content-Type: application/sdp Allow: INVITE, INFO, PRACK, ACK, BYE, CANCEL, OPTIONS, NOTIFY, REGISTER, SUBSCRIBE, REFER, PUBLISH, UPDATE, MESSAGE Max-Forwards: 70 User-Agent: Yealink SIP-T46G 28.81.0.25 Allow-Events: talk,hold,conference,refer,check-sync Content-Length: Procedure Reserve # in User Name can be configured using the following methods.

  • Page 593: Password Dial

    Configuring Basic Features Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Reserve # in User Name. Click Confirm to accept the change. Password Dial Password dial feature allows the callee number to be partly displayed on the IP phone when placing a call.
  • Page 594 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default 1-Enabled Web User Interface: Features->General Information->PswDial Phone User Interface: None String within 32 Blank features.password_dial.prefix characters Description: Configures the prefix of the password dial number. Example: features.password_dial.prefix = 12 Web User Interface: Features->General Information->PswPrefix...

  • Page 595: Unregister When Reboot

    Configuring Basic Features Enter the desired number of hidden digits in the PswLength field. Click Confirm to accept the change. Unregister When Reboot Unregister when reboot feature allows IP phones to unregister first before re-registering the account when finishing a reboot. Procedure Unregister when reboot can be configured using the following methods.
  • Page 596 Default finishing a reboot. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2)

  • Page 597: Reliable Retransmission

    Content-Type: application/sdp Allow: INVITE, INFO, PRACK, ACK, BYE, CANCEL, OPTIONS, NOTIFY, REGISTER, SUBSCRIBE, REFER, PUBLISH, UPDATE, MESSAGE Max-Forwards: 70 User-Agent: Yealink SIP-T46G 28.81.0.25 Supported: 100rel Allow-Events: talk,hold,conference,refer,check-sync Content-Length: Procedure 100 Reliable Retransmission can be configured using the following methods.
  • Page 598 Enables or disables the 100 reliable retransmission feature for account X. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G)

  • Page 599: Reboot In Talking

    Configuring Basic Features Reboot in Talking Reboot in talking feature allows IP phones to reboot during an active call when it receives a reboot request by action URI. For more information on action URI, refer to Action URI on page 739.

  • Page 600: Answer By Hand

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Reboot in Talking field. Click Confirm to accept the change. A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot. Click OK to reboot the phone.

  • Page 601: Usb Recording

    USB Recording Call Recording Yealink IP phones support manual recording during a call or automatic recording once the call is set up (automatic recording is only applicable to CP860/CP920 IP phones). Before recording, ensure that the USB flash drive has been inserted into the USB port of the phone or USB port of the PSTN box CPN10 (CPN10 is only applicable to CP860/CP920 IP phones).
  • Page 602 If it is set to 1 (Enabled), you can record the active audio call for the phone by pressing the Start REC soft key, and the recorded calls will be saved to the USB flash drive. For SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T42S/T41S/T29G/T27G/CP860: The default valu is 0.

  • Page 603: Idle Recording

    None Idle Recording Yealink CP860/CP920 IP phones support recording when the phone is idle, helping users record an important discussion in local conference room. Before recording, ensure that the USB flash drive has been inserted into the USB port of the phone or USB port of the PSTN box CPN10.

  • Page 604: Csta Control

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameter Permitted Values Default 1-Enabled Note: It is only applicable to CP860/CP920 IP phones. It works only if the value of the parameter “features.usb_call_recording.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled). Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None...
  • Page 605 Configuring Basic Features Parameter Permitted Values Default Applications) feature on the IP phone. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2/CP860 IP phones. If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect. Web User Interface: Features->Remote Control->CSTA Control Phone User Interface:...

  • Page 606: Quick Login

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Quick Login Quick login feature allows users to fast access to web user interface using the request URI “https://username:password@phoneIPAddress” (e.g., https://admin:admin@192.168.0.10). You will navigate to the Status web page after accessing the web user interface. It is helpful for users to quickly log into the web user interface without entering the username and password in the login page.

  • Page 607: Cloud

    None Cloud The CP860/CP920 IP phones support cloud feature. The Cloud enterprise administrator uses the Yealink VC Cloud management service to assign each user an individual Cloud account. For Yealink VC Cloud Management Service Administrator Guide more information, refer to...
  • Page 608 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameter Permitted Values Default 1-Enabled Note: It is only applicable to CP860/CP920 IP phones. Web User Interface: Features->General Information->Cloud Enable Phone User Interface: None To configure Cloud feature via web user interface: Click on Features->General Information.

  • Page 609: Configuring Advanced Features

    Configuring Advanced Features Configuring Advanced Features This chapter provides information for making configuration changes for the following advanced features: Remote Phone Book  Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP)  Busy Lamp Field (BLF)  Busy Lamp Field (BLF) List  Hide Feature Access Codes ...

  • Page 610: Remote Phone Book

    URL of the file (Menu.xml) in the configuration files. You can ask the distributor or Yealink FAE for remote XML phone book template. You can also obtain the remote XML phone book template online: http://support.yealink.com/documentFront/forwardToDocumentFrontDisplayPage.
  • Page 611 Configuring Advanced Features Where: Specify the contact name between <Name> and </Name>. Specify the contact number between <Telephone> and </Telephone>. Save the file and place this file to the provisioning server. When creating a Menu.xml file, learn the following: <YealinkIPPhoneMenu> indicates the start of a remote phone book file and ...
  • Page 612 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones For each department that you want to add, add the following strings to the file. Each starts on a separate line: <MenuItem> Department1 <Name> </Name> <URL>http://10.2.9.1:99/Department.xml</URL> </MenuItem> For each XML file that you want to add, add the following strings to the file. Each starts on a separate line: <SoftKeyItem>...
  • Page 613 During the auto provisioning process, the IP phone connects to the provisioning server “192.168.1.20”, and downloads the remote phone book file “Menu.xml”. Yealink supplies a phonebook generation tool to generate a remote XML phone book. For more Note Yealink Phonebook Generation Tool User Guide...
  • Page 614 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Specify how often the IP phone refreshes the local cache of the remote phone book. Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=contacts -remote&q=load Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default URL within 511 remote_phonebook.data.X.url Blank characters...
  • Page 615 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default characters Description: Configures the display name of the remote phone book. Example: remote_phonebook.display_name = Friends “Friends” will be displayed on the LCD screen at the phone path Menu->Directory. If it is left blank, Remote Phone Book will be the display name. Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S IP phones.
  • Page 616 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default None features.remote_phonebook.enter_update_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to refresh the local cache of the remote phone book at a time when accessing the remote phone book. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Web User Interface:...

  • Page 617: Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (Ldap)

    Configuring Advanced Features Enter the desired time in the Update Time Interval(Seconds) field. Click Confirm to accept the change. Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) LDAP is an application protocol for accessing and maintaining information services for the distributed directory over an IP network. IP phones can be configured to interface with a corporate directory server that supports LDAP version 2 or 3.
  • Page 618 Office phone number mobile mobilephoneNumber Mobile or cellular phone number ipPhone IPphoneNumber Home phone number LDAP Directory on Yealink IP Phones For more information on LDAP, refer to Procedure LDAP can be configured using the following methods. Configure LDAP. Parameters: ldap.enable ldap.search_type...
  • Page 619 Configuring Advanced Features ldap.call_in_lookup ldap.call_out_lookup ldap.ldap_sort ldap.incoming_call_special_search.e nable Assign an LDAP key. Parameters: linekey.X.type/ programablekey.X.type/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.type linekey.X.label/ programablekey.X.label/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.label linekey.X.shortlabel Configure LDAP. Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =contacts-LDAP&q=load Web User Interface Assign an LDAP key. Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =dsskey&q=load&model=0 Assign an LDAP key. Phone User Interface Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters...
  • Page 620 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default ldap.search_type 0 or 1 Description: Configures the search type for LDAP contact look up. 0-Prefix matching 1-Approximate string matching If it is set to 0 (Prefix matching), the IP phone will search the LDAP contact numbers or names start with the entered character(s).
  • Page 621 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default String within 99 ldap.number_filter Blank characters Description: Configures the search criteria for LDAP contact numbers look up. The “*” symbol in the filter stands for any number. The “%” symbol in the filter stands for the number entered by the user.
  • Page 622 Configures the LDAP search base which corresponds to the location of the LDAP phone book from which the LDAP search request begins. The search base narrows the search scope and decreases directory search time. Example: ldap.base = dc=yealink,dc=cn Web User Interface: Directory->LDAP->Base Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 623 Configures the user name used to login the LDAP server. This parameter can be left blank in case the server allows anonymous to login. Otherwise you will need to provide the user name to login the LDAP server. Example: ldap.user = cn=manager,dc=yealink,dc=cn Web User Interface: Directory->LDAP->Username Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 624 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default String within 99 ldap.name_attr Blank characters Description: Configures the name attributes of each record to be returned by the LDAP server. It compresses the search results. You can configure multiple name attributes separated by spaces.
  • Page 625 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: Directory->LDAP->LDAP Display Name Phone User Interface: None ldap.version 2 or 3 Description: Configures the LDAP protocol version supported by the IP phone. Make sure the protocol value corresponds with the version assigned on the LDAP server. Web User Interface: Directory->LDAP->Protocol Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 626 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default ldap.ldap_sort 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to sort the search results in alphabetical order or numerical order. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Web User Interface: Directory->LDAP->LDAP Sorting Results Phone User Interface: None...
  • Page 627 The digit 38 stands for the key type LDAP. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 628 Parameters Permitted Values Default For SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G IP phones: The default value of the line key 1-16 is 15, and the default value of the line key 17-27 is 0. For SIP-T52S IP phones: The default value of the line key 1-12 is 15, and the default value of the line key 13-21 is 0.
  • Page 629 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default When X=8, the default value is 52 (Switch Account Down). When X=9, the default value is 33 (Status). When X=10, the default value is 0 (NA). When X=13, the default value is 0 (NA). For SIP-T29G/T27P/T27G IP phones: When X=1, the default value is 28 (History).
  • Page 630 When X=9, the default value is 33 (Status). When X=13, the default value is 0 (NA). For ext keys: For SIP-T54S/T52S IP phones: When Y=1-60, the default value is 0 (NA). For SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S IP phones: When Y= 1 to 40, the default value is 0 (NA).
  • Page 631 Default For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G)
  • Page 632 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Select the desired values from the corresponding pull-down lists. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure an LDAP key via web user interface: Click on Dsskey->Line Key (or Programable Key). In the desired DSS key field, select LDAP from the pull-down list of Type.

  • Page 633: Busy Lamp Field (Blf)

    You can manually configure the period of the BLF subscription. Example of a SUBSCRIBE message: SUBSCRIBE sip:1011@10.3.20.2:5060 SIP/2.0 Via: SIP/2.0/UDP 10.3.20.1:5060;branch=z9hG4bK2940676338 From: "1010" <sip:1010@10.2.1.48:5060>;tag=2493044525 To: <sip:1011@10.2.1.48:5060>;tag=2527548726 Call-ID: 0_3538292381@10.3.20.1 CSeq: 2 SUBSCRIBE Contact: <sip:1010@10.3.20.1:5060> Accept: application/dialog-info+xml Max-Forwards: 70 User-Agent: Yealink SIP-T46G 28.81.0.25 Expires: 30 Event: dialog Content-Length: 0...
  • Page 634 Via: SIP/2.0/UDP 10.3.20.2:5060;branch=z9hG4bK276311022 From: <sip:1011@10.2.1.48:5060>;tag=3436332841 To: "1010" <sip:1010@10.2.1.48:5060>;tag=3098567568 Call-ID: 0_4117916748@10.3.20.1 CSeq: 4 NOTIFY Contact: <sip:1011@10.3.20.2:5060> Content-Type: application/dialog-info+xml Max-Forwards: 70 User-Agent: Yealink SIP-T27P 45.80.0.20 Subscription-State: active;expires=17 Event: dialog Content-Length: <?xml version="1.0"?> <dialog-info xmlns="urn:ietf:params:xml:ns:dialog-info" version="3" state="partial" entity="sip:1011@10.2.1.48:5060"> <dialog id="74" call-id="0_2561109579@10.3.20.1" local-tag="2778958897" remote-tag="1132018898"...
  • Page 635 The IP phone is able to successfully refresh the SUBSCRIBE before expiration of the SUBSCRIBE dialog. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 636 Configures the event of the BLF subscription for account X. 0-dialog 1-presence X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2/CP860/CP920 IP phones.

  • Page 637: Visual Alert And Audio Alert For Blf Pickup

    Configuring Advanced Features Enter the desired period of BLF subscription in the Subscribe Period(Seconds) field. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure out dialog BLF via web user interface: Click on Account->Advanced. Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Out Dialog BLF.
  • Page 638 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Ring Type for BLF Pickup Ring type for BLF pickup allows you to configure a different ring tone to distinguish the incoming call on your phone from that on the monitored phone. It helps clearly notify you of the ringing state of a monitored phone.
  • Page 639 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: None features.pickup.blf_audio_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to play an audio alert when the monitored user receives an incoming call. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2/CP860/CP920 IP phones. Web User Interface: Features->Call Pickup->Audio Alert for BLF Pickup Phone User Interface:...

  • Page 640: Blf Led Mode

    E2 IP phones. BLF LED mode is also applicable to the expansion module EXP50 (connected to SIP-T54S/T52S IP phones), EXP40 (connected to SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S IP phones), EXP20 (connected to SIP-T29G/T27P/T27G IP phones). The following table lists the LED statuses of the BLF key when BLF LED Mode is set to 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 respectively.
  • Page 641 Configuring Advanced Features LED Status Description number. The monitored user does not exist. Line Key/Expansion Module Key LED (configured as a BLF key or a BLF List key and BLF LED Mode is set to 1) LED Status Description Fast-flashing red (200ms) The monitored user receives an incoming call.
  • Page 642 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones LED Status Description The monitored user is idle. The monitored user does not exist. Line Key/Expansion Module Key LED (configured as a BLF key or a BLF List key and BLF LED Mode is set to 4.

  • Page 643: Configuring Blf Led Status And Blf Key Behavior

    Configuring Advanced Features To configure BLF LED mode via web user interface: Click on Features->General Information. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of BLF LED Mode. Click Confirm to accept the change. Configuring BLF LED Status and BLF Key Behavior You can customize the BLF LED status and BLF key behavior using the EDK macros if required.
  • Page 644 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Procedure BLF LED status and BLF key behavior can be configured using the configuration files. Configure BLF LED status and BLF key behavior when the monitored user is idle. Parameters: blf.enhanced.idle.enable blf.enhanced.idle.led blf.enhanced.idle.callin.action...
  • Page 645 Configuring Advanced Features Configure BLF LED status and BLF key behavior when a call is being parked against the monitored phone. Parameters: blf.enhanced.parked.enable blf.enhanced.parked.led blf.enhanced.parked.callin.action blf.enhanced.parked.talking.action blf.enhanced.parked.idle.action Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default blf.enhanced.idle.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to display the custom BLF/BLF List key LED status and perform the custom behavior when pressing the BLF/BLF List key if the monitored user is idle.
  • Page 646 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None blf.enhanced.idle.idle.action String Blank Description: Configures the behavior when pressing the BLF/BLF list key if the monitor and monitored user are idle.
  • Page 647 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the behavior when pressing the BLF/BLF list key if the monitor is talking and monitored user is idle. Example: blf.enhanced.idle.talking.action = newcall Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2/CP860/CP920 IP phones. It works only if the value of the parameter “blf.enhanced.idle.enable”...
  • Page 648 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default value of the parameter “blf.enhanced.callin.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled). Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None blf.enhanced.callin.idle.action String Blank Description: Configures the behavior when pressing the BLF/BLF list key if the monitor is idle and monitored user is ringing.
  • Page 649 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Configures the behavior when pressing the BLF/BLF list key if the monitor is talking and monitored user is ringing. Example: blf.enhanced.callin.talking.action = newcall Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2/CP860/CP920 IP phones. It works only if the value of the parameter “blf.enhanced.callin.enable”...
  • Page 650 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default None Phone User Interface: None blf.enhanced.callout.idle.action String Blank Description: Configures the behavior when pressing the BLF/BLF list key if the monitor is idle and monitored user is calling out. Example: blf.enhanced.callout.idle.action = newcall Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2/CP860/CP920 IP phones.
  • Page 651 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Example: blf.enhanced.callout.talking.action = newcall Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2/CP860/CP920 IP phones. It works only if the value of the parameter “blf.enhanced.callout.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled). Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None blf.enhanced.talking.enable...
  • Page 652 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: None blf.enhanced.talking.idle.action String Blank Description: Configures the behavior when pressing the BLF/BLF list key if the monitor is idle and monitored user is talking. Example: blf.enhanced.talking.idle.action = newcall Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2/CP860/CP920 IP phones.
  • Page 653 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default blf.enhanced.talking.talking.action = newcall Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2/CP860/CP920 IP phones. It works only if the value of the parameter “blf.enhanced.talking.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled). Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None blf.enhanced.parked.enable 0 or 1...
  • Page 654 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default None blf.enhanced.parked.idle.action String Blank Description: Configures the behavior when pressing the BLF/BLF list key if the monitor is idle and a call is being parked against the monitored phone. Example: blf.enhanced.parked.idle.action = newcall Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2/CP860/CP920 IP phones.

  • Page 655: Configuring A Blf Key

    Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2/CP860/CP920 IP phones. It works only if the value of the parameter “blf.enhanced.parked.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled). Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None Configuring a BLF Key You can configure a BLF key on a supervisor’s phone to monitor the IP phone user status (busy or idle).
  • Page 656 The digit 16 stands for the key type BLF. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 657 Configures the desired line to apply the BLF key. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 658 Configures the phone number or extension of the monitored user. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 659 Configures the pickup code for BLF feature. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 660 (Optional.) Configures the label displayed on the LCD screen for each DSS key. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G)

  • Page 661: Busy Lamp Field (Blf) List

    Configuring Advanced Features To configure a BLF key via web user interface: Click on Dsskey->Line Key. In the desired DSS key field, select BLF from the pull-down list of Type. Enter the phone number or extension you want to monitor in the Value field. Select the desired line from the pull-down list of Line.
  • Page 662 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Procedure BLF List can be configured using the following methods. Configure BLF List. Parameters: account.X.blf.blf_list_uri <MAC>.cfg account.X.blf_list_code account.X.blf_list_barge_in_code account.X.blf_list_retrieve_call_parked_code Specify whether to automatically configure the BLF list keys. Parameter: Central Provisioning phone_setting.auto_blf_list_enable (Configuration...
  • Page 663 Configuring Advanced Features Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default phone_setting.auto_blf_list_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to automatically configure the BLF list keys. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2/CP860/CP920 IP phones. Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 664 Default Description: Configures the BLF List URI to monitor a list of users for account X. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 665 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) Example: account.1.blf_list_barge_in_code = *33...
  • Page 666 The digit 39 stands for the key type BLF List. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 667 Configures the desired line to apply the BLF List key. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 668 Default X ranges from 1 to 6, Y ranges from 1 to 20, 22 to 40 (Ext key 21 cannot be configured). Permitted Values: 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G) 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G)

  • Page 669: Hide Feature Access Codes

    Configuring Advanced Features (Optional.) Enter the retrieve call parked code in the BLF List Retrieve Call Parked Code field. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure BLF List keys manually via web user interface: Click on Dsskey->Line Key. In the desired DSS key field, select BLF List from the pull-down list of Type. Repeat the step 2, configure more BLF list keys.
  • Page 670 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Pick up  Group Pick up  Barge In (not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2/CP860/CP920 IP phones)  Retrieve  Call Park  Call Pull (not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2/CP860/CP920 IP phones) ...

  • Page 671: Automatic Call Distribution (Acd)

    Configuring Advanced Features Select Enabled from the pull-down list of Hide Feature Access Codes. Click Confirm to accept the change. Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) ACD enables organizations to manage a large number of phone calls on an individual basis. ACD enables the use of IP phones in a call-center role by automatically distributing incoming calls to available users, or agents.
  • Page 672 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Procedure ACD can be configured using the following methods. Configure ACD feature on a per- line basis. Parameters: <MAC>.cfg account.X.acd.enable account.X.acd.available account.X.subscribe_acd_expires Configure ACD auto available. Parameters: Central Provisioning acd.auto_available (Configuration File) acd.auto_available_timer Assign an ACD key.
  • Page 673 Permitted Values Default 0-Disabled 1-Enabled X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2)
  • Page 674 Permitted Values Default Configures the period (in seconds) of ACD subscription for account X. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G)
  • Page 675 The digit 42 stands for the key type ACD. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 676 (Optional.) Configures the label displayed on the LCD screen for each DSS key. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 677 X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) For ext keys: For SIP-T54S/T52S: X ranges from 1 to 3, Y ranges from 1 to 60. For SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S: X ranges from 1 to 6, Y ranges from 1 to 40.
  • Page 678 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure the ACD auto available timer feature via web user interface: Click on Features->ACD. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of ACD Auto Available. Enter the desired timer in the ACD Auto Available Timer(0~120s) field.

  • Page 679: Shared Call Appearance (Sca)

    Configuring Advanced Features To configure an ACD key via phone user interface: Press Menu->Features->DSS Keys. Select the desired DSS key. Press , or the Switch soft key to select ACD from the Type field. (Optional.) Enter the string that will appear on the LCD screen in the Label field. Press the Save soft key to accept the change.
  • Page 680 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Procedure SCA can be configured using the following methods. Configure the registration line type. Parameter: account.X.shared_line <MAC>.cfg Configure the call pull feature access code. Parameter: account.X.shared_line_callpull_code Configure the private hold soft key. Central Parameters: Provisioning...
  • Page 681 1-Shared Call Appearance 3-Draft BLA If it is set to 0 (Disabled), the shared line feature is disabled. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 682 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default None Private Hold Soft Key Configuring the private hold soft key may affect the softkey layout in the Talking state. For more information, refer to Softkey Layout on page 287.
  • Page 683 The digit 20 stands for the key type Private Hold. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 684 (Optional.) Configures the label displayed on the LCD screen for each DSS key. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27G)
  • Page 685 Permitted Parameters Default Values For ext keys: For SIP-T54S/T52S: X ranges from 1 to 3, Y ranges from 1 to 60. For SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S: X ranges from 1 to 6, Y ranges from 1 to 40. For SIP-T29G/T27P/T27G: X ranges from 1 to 6, Y ranges from 1 to 20, 22 to 40 (Ext key 21 cannot be configured).
  • Page 686 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones To configure the shared line settings on the primary phone via web user interface: Register the primary account (e.g., 4609). Click on Advanced, select Shared Call Appearance from the pull-down list of Shared Line.
  • Page 687 Configuring Advanced Features To configure the shared line settings on alternate phone via web user interface: Register the alternate account (e.g., 4609_1). (Enter the primary account 4609 in the Register Name field.) Click on Advanced, select Shared Call Appearance from the pull-down list of Shared Line.
  • Page 688 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones To configure the call pull feature access code via web user interface: Click on Account->Advanced. Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account. Enter the call pull feature access code (e.g., *11) in the Call Pull Feature Access Code field.

  • Page 689: Bridge Lines Appearance (Bla)

    Configuring Advanced Features The PriHold appears in the Selected Softkeys column. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure a private hold key via web user interface: Click on Dsskey->Line Key. In the desired DSS key field, select Private Hold from the pull-down list of Type. (Optional.) Enter the string that will appear on the LCD screen in the Label field.
  • Page 690 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones depends on support from a SIP server. Any IP phone can be used to originate or receive calls on the bridge line. An incoming call to the BLA number can be presented to multiple phones in the group simultaneously. The incoming call can be answered on any IP phone of the group but not all.
  • Page 691 1-Shared Call Appearance 3-Draft BLA If it is set to 0 (Disabled), the shared line feature is disabled. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 692 Default Description: Configures the period (in seconds) of the BLA subscription for account X. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G)

  • Page 693: Message Waiting Indicator (Mwi)

    Configuring Advanced Features Click Confirm to accept the change. Message Waiting Indicator (MWI) Message Waiting Indicator (MWI) informs users of the number of messages waiting in their mailbox without calling the mailbox. IP phones support both audio and visual MWI when receiving new voice messages.
  • Page 694 If it is set to 0 (Disabled), the server automatically sends a message-summary NOTIFY in a new dialog each time the MWI status changes. (This requires server support) X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S)
  • Page 695 The IP phone is able to successfully refresh the SUBSCRIBE for message-summary events before expiration of the subscription dialog. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 696 Description: Configures the voice mail number for account X. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G)
  • Page 697 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: Account->Advanced->Voice Mail Display Phone User Interface: None To configure subscribe for MWI via web user interface: Click on Account->Advanced. Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Subscribe for MWI. Enter the period time in the MWI Subscription Period(Seconds) field.

  • Page 698: Short Message Service (Sms)

    Click Confirm to accept the change. Short Message Service (SMS) SMS feature allows users to send and receive text messages using Yealink IP phones (except CP920 IP phones). It depends on support from a SIP server. You can send text messages by initiating a new dialogue or by replying to a received message.
  • Page 699 Configuring Advanced Features Text Message option will disappear. When receiving a new text message, the phone will play a warning tone. The power indicator LED will slowly flash red, and the LCD screen will prompt receiving new text messages with the number of waiting messages or a flashing icon.

  • Page 700: Multicast Paging

     supporting paging with Yealink IP phones running firmware version 80 or prior (e.g., Cisco IP phones) are all grouped into the channel 0. This is for compatibility with the old Yealink IP phones and third-party devices. 1 to 25: each corresponds to the Polycom’s channel 1 to 25 respectively. This is for ...
  • Page 701 Configuring Advanced Features Procedure Configuration changes can be performed using the following methods. Specify a multicast codec for the IP phone to send the RTP stream. Parameter: multicast.codec Configure the multicast IP address and port number for a paging list key. Parameter: multicast.paging_address.X.ip_address Configure the multicast paging group name...
  • Page 702 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Specify a multicast codec for the IP phone to send the RTP stream. Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=feature s-general&q=load Configure the multicast IP address and port number for a paging list key. Configure the multicast paging group name for a paging list key.
  • Page 703 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: Features->General Information->Multicast Codec Phone User Interface: None multicast.paging_address.X.ip_address String Blank (X ranges from 1 to 31) Description: Configures the IP address and port number of the multicast paging group in the paging list.
  • Page 704 Configures the channel of the multicast paging group in the paging list. If it is set to 0, all the Yealink IP phones running firmware version 80 or prior or Yealink IP phones listens to channel 0 or third-party available devices (e.g., Cisco IP phones) in the paging group can receive the RTP stream.
  • Page 705 Default X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) For programable keys: X=1-10, 12-14 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S) X=1-10, 13 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S/T40P/T40G) X=1-14 (for SIP-T29G/T27P/T27G) X=1-10, 14 (for SIP-T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2) X=1-9, 13, 14 (for SIP-T19(P) E2)
  • Page 706 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default For SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S IP phones: When X=1, the default value is 28 (History). When X=2, the default value is 61 (Directory). When X=3, the default value is 5 (DND).
  • Page 707 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default When X=9, the default value is 33 (Status). When X=10, the default value is 0 (NA). When X=11, the default value is 0 (NA). When X=12, the default value is 0 (NA). When X=13, the default value is 0 (NA). When X=14, the default value is 2 (Forward).
  • Page 708 Configures the multicast IP address and port number. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27G)
  • Page 709 (Optional.) Configures the label displayed on the LCD screen for each DSS key. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27G)
  • Page 710 Configures the channel of multicast paging group. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27G)
  • Page 711 The digit 66 stands for the key type Paging List. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27G)
  • Page 712 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default X=1-10, 12-14 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S) X=1-10, 13 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S/T40P/T40G) X=1-14 (for SIP-T29G/T27P/T27G) X=1-10, 14 (for SIP-T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2) X=1-9, 13, 14 (for SIP-T19(P) E2) X=1-6, 9, 13 (for CP860/CP920)
  • Page 713 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default When X=3, the default value is 5 (DND). When X=4, the default value is 30 (Menu). When X=5, the default value is 28 (History). When X=6, the default value is 61 (Directory). When X=7, the default value is 51 (Switch Account Up). When X=8, the default value is 52 (Switch Account Down).
  • Page 714 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default When X=12, the default value is 0 (NA). When X=13, the default value is 0 (NA). When X=14, the default value is 2 (Forward). For SIP-T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2 IP phones: When X=1, the default value is 28 (History).
  • Page 715 (Optional.) Configures the label displayed on the LCD screen for each DSS key. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27G)
  • Page 716 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Dsskey->Line Key/Programable Key->Label Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->DSS Keys->Line Key X->Label linekey.X.shortlabel String within 99 Blank characters (X ranges from 1 to 21) Description: (Optional.) Configures the short label displayed on the LCD screen for line key. Note: It is only applicable to SIP-T52S IP phones.
  • Page 717 Configuring Advanced Features Enter the label in the Label field. The label will appear on the LCD screen when sending the RTP multicast. Select the desired channel from the pull-down list Channel. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure a multicast paging key via web user interface: Click on Dsskey->Line Key (or Programable Key).

  • Page 718: Receiving Rtp Stream

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones (Optional.) Enter the string that will appear on the LCD screen in the Label field. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure a multicast paging key via phone user interface: Press Menu->Features->DSS Keys.
  • Page 719 Configuring Advanced Features paging calls with higher or equal priority are automatically answered and the ones with lower priority are ignored. Ignore DND This parameter defines the lowest priority of the multicast paging call that can be received when DND is activated in phone mode. If the value of the parameter is configured as disabled, all incoming multicast paging calls will be automatically ignored when DND is activated in phone mode.
  • Page 720 If it is set to 1 to 25, the IP phone can receive an RTP stream of the pre-configured multicast address on the channel 1 to 25 respectively from Yealink or Polycom IP phones. If it is set to 26 to 30, the IP phone can receive the RTP stream of the pre-configured...
  • Page 721 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default multicast address on the channel 26 to 30 respectively from Yealink IP phones. Example: multicast.listen_address.1.channel = 2 Web User Interface: Directory->Multicast IP->Multicast Listening->Channel Phone User Interface: None multicast.listen_address.X.volume Integer from 0 to 15...
  • Page 722 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default None multicast.receive_priority.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to handle the incoming multicast paging calls when there is an active multicast paging call on the IP phone. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled If it is set to 0 (Disabled), the IP phone will ignore the incoming multicast paging calls...
  • Page 723 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: None multicast.receive.ignore_dnd.priority Integer from 0 to 31 Description: Configures the lowest priority of the multicast paging call that can be received when DND is activated in phone mode. 1 is the highest priority, 31 is the lowest priority. 0-Disabled …...

  • Page 724: Dsskey Recording (Record And Url Record)

    Dsskey Recording (Record and URL Record) Yealink IP phones support record calls by pressing the call record key. It depends on support from a SIP server. When the user presses the call record key, the IP phone sends a record request to the server.

  • Page 725: Url Record

    GET /URLRecord/record.xml HTTP/1.1\r\n Request Method: GET Request URI: /URLRecord/record.xml Request version: HTTP/1.1 Host: 10.3.5.97:8080\r\n User-Agent: Yealink SIP-T46G 28.81.0.25 00:15:65:74:B1:50\r\n If the recording is successfully started, the server will respond with a 200 OK message. Example of a 200 OK message: <YealinkIPPhoneText> <Title>...
  • Page 726 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Example of a 200 OK message: <YealinkIPPhoneText> <Title> </Title> <Text> Probably the recording box is full. </Text> <YealinkIPPhoneText> When the user presses the URL record key for the second time, the IP phone sends an HTTP GET message to the server, and then the server will respond with a 200 OK message.
  • Page 727 The digit 25 stands for the key type Record. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 728 String within 99 Blank expansion_module.X.key.Y.label characters Description: (Optional.) Configures the label displayed on the LCD screen for each DSS key. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G)
  • Page 729 X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) For ext keys: For SIP-T54S/T52S: X ranges from 1 to 3, Y ranges from 1 to 60. For SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S: X ranges from 1 to 6, Y ranges from 1 to 40.
  • Page 730 The digit 35 stands for the key type URL Record. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 731 Configures the URL to record a call. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 732 (Optional.) Configures the label displayed on the LCD screen for each DSS key. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 733 Configuring Advanced Features To configure a record key via web user interface: Click on Dsskey->Line Key. In the desired DSS key field, select Record from the pull-down list of Type. (Optional.) Enter the string that will appear on the LCD screen in the Label field. Click Confirm to accept the change.

  • Page 734: Hot Desking

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Enter the URL in the Value field. Press the Save soft key to accept the change. Hot Desking Hot desking originates from the definition of being the temporary physical occupant of a work station or surface by a particular employee.
  • Page 735 Configuring Advanced Features Details of Configuration Parameters: Permitted Parameters Default Values hotdesking.dsskey_register_name_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to provide input field of register name on the hot desking login wizard when pressing the Hot Desking key. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It is not applicable to CP860/CP920 IP phones.
  • Page 736 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values None Phone User Interface: None hotdesking.dsskey_sip_server_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to provide input field of SIP server on the hot desking login wizard when pressing the Hot Desking key.
  • Page 737 The digit 34 stands for the key type Hot Desking. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 738 The default value of the line key 1-16 is 15, and the default value of the line key 17-29 is 0. For SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G IP phones: The default value of the line key 1-16 is 15, and the default value of the line key 17-27 is 0.
  • Page 739 Configuring Advanced Features Permitted Parameters Default Values When X=5, the default value is 28 (History). When X=6, the default value is 61 (Directory). When X=7, the default value is 51 (Switch Account Up). When X=8, the default value is 52 (Switch Account Down). When X=9, the default value is 33 (Status).
  • Page 740 (Optional.) Configures the label displayed on the LCD screen for each DSS key. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 741 For programable keys: X ranges from 1 to 4. For ext keys: For SIP-T54S/T52S: X ranges from 1 to 3, Y ranges from 1 to 60. For SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S: X ranges from 1 to 6, Y ranges from 1 to 40.

  • Page 742: Logon Wizard

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones (Optional.) Enter the string that will appear on the LCD screen in the Label field. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure a hot desking key via phone user interface: Press Menu->Features->DSS Keys.
  • Page 743 Configuring Advanced Features es-general&q=load Details of the Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default 0 or 1 phone_setting.logon_wizard Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to provide the logon wizard during the first startup. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It is not applicable to CP860/CP920 IP phones. It works only if there is no registered account on the IP phone.
  • Page 744 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default 1-Enabled Note: It is not applicable to CP860/CP920 IP phones. It works only if there is no registered account on the IP phone and the value of the parameter “phone_setting.logon_wizard” is set to 1 (Enabled).
  • Page 745 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default hotdesking.startup_outbound_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to provide input field of outbound server on the logon wizard during the first startup. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It is not applicable to CP860/CP920 IP phones. It works only if there is no registered account on the IP phone and the value of the parameter “phone_setting.logon_wizard”...

  • Page 746: Action Url

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Action URL Action URL allows IP phones to interact with web server applications by sending an HTTP or HTTPS GET request. You can specify a URL that triggers a GET request when a specified event occurs.
  • Page 747 Configuring Advanced Features Event Description UnHeld When a held call is resumed. Mute When the IP phone mutes a call. UnMute When the IP phone un-mutes a call. Missed Call When the IP phone misses a call. IP Changed When the IP address of the IP phone changes. When the state of the IP phone changes from idle to Idle To Busy busy.
  • Page 748 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones The following table lists pre-defined variable values. Variable Value Description $mac The MAC address of the IP phone. The IP address of the IP phone. $model The IP phone model. $firmware The firmware version of the IP phone.
  • Page 749 Configuring Advanced Features Procedure Action URL can be configured using the following methods. Configure action URL. Parameters: action_url.setup_completed action_url.registered action_url.unregistered action_url.register_failed action_url.off_hook action_url.on_hook action_url.incoming_call action_url.outgoing_call action_url.call_established action_url.dnd_on action_url.dnd_off action_url.always_fwd_on action_url.always_fwd_off action_url.busy_fwd_on action_url.busy_fwd_off Central Provisioning <y0000000000xx>.cfg action_url.no_answer_fwd_on (Configuration File) action_url.no_answer_fwd_off action_url.transfer_call action_url.blind_transfer_call action_url.attended_transfer_call action_url.hold...
  • Page 750 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones action_url.reject_incoming_call action_url.answer_new_incoming_call action_url.transfer_finished action_url.transfer_failed action_url.setup_autop_finish action_url.call_waiting_on action_url.call_waiting_off action_url.headset action_url.handfree action_url.cancel_callout action_url.remote_busy action_url.call_remote_canceled Configure action URL. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=f eatures-actionurl&q=load Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default action_url.setup_completed URL within 511 characters Blank...
  • Page 751 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default $call_id  $callerID  $calledNumber  Example: action_url.setup_completed = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Web User Interface: Features->Action URL->Setup Completed Phone User Interface: None action_url.registered Blank URL within 511 characters Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends after an account is registered. Example: action_url.registered = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Web User Interface:...
  • Page 752 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Example: action_url.register_failed = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Web User Interface: Features->Action URL->Register Failed Phone User Interface: None action_url.off_hook Blank URL within 511 characters Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when off hook. Example: action_url.off_hook = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Web User Interface:...
  • Page 753 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: Features->Action URL->Incoming Call Phone User Interface: None action_url.outgoing_call Blank URL within 511 characters Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when placing a call. Example: action_url.outgoing_call = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Web User Interface: Features->Action URL->Outgoing Call Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 754 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default None action_url.dnd_off Blank URL within 511 characters Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when DND feature is deactivated. Example: action_url.dnd_off = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Web User Interface: Features->Action URL->Close DND Phone User Interface: None...
  • Page 755 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when busy forward feature is activated. Example: action_url.busy_fwd_on = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Web User Interface: Features->Action URL->Open Busy Forward Phone User Interface: None action_url.busy_fwd_off Blank URL within 511 characters Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when busy forward feature is deactivated.
  • Page 756 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default deactivated. Example: action_url.no_answer_fwd_off = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Web User Interface: Features->Action URL->Close NoAnswer Forward Phone User Interface: None action_url.transfer_call Blank URL within 511 characters Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when performing a transfer. Example: action_url.transfer_call = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Web User Interface:...
  • Page 757 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default action_url.attended_transfer_call = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Web User Interface: Features->Action URL->Attended Transfer Phone User Interface: None action_url.hold Blank URL within 511 characters Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when placing a call on hold. Example: action_url.hold = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Web User Interface:...
  • Page 758 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: None action_url.unheld Blank URL within 511 characters Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when a call being held is resumed. Example: action_url.unheld = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Web User Interface:...
  • Page 759 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default action_url.missed_call Blank URL within 511 characters Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when missing a call. Example: action_url.missed_call = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Web User Interface: Features->Action URL->Missed Call Phone User Interface: None action_url.call_terminated Blank URL within 511 characters...
  • Page 760 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when changing the state of the IP phone from idle to busy. Example: action_url.idle_to_busy = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Web User Interface: Features->Action URL->Idle To Busy Phone User Interface: None...
  • Page 761 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when rejecting an incoming call. Example: action_url.reject_incoming_call = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Web User Interface: Features->Action URL->Reject Incoming Call Phone User Interface: None action_url.answer_new_incoming_call Blank URL within 511 characters Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when answering a new incoming call.
  • Page 762 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when failing to transfer a call. Example: action_url.transfer_failed = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Web User Interface: Features->Action URL->Transfer Failed Phone User Interface: None action_url.setup_autop_finish Blank...
  • Page 763 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Example: action_url.call_waiting_off = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Web User Interface: Features->Action URL->Close Call Waiting Phone User Interface: None action_url.headset Blank URL within 511 characters Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when pressing the HEADSET key. Example: action_url.headset = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Note: It is not applicable to CP860/CP920 IP phones.
  • Page 764 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default back state. Example: action_url.cancel_callout = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Web User Interface: Features->Action URL->Cancel Call Out Phone User Interface: None action_url.remote_busy Blank URL within 511 characters Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when the outgoing call is rejected. Example: action_url.remote_busy = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Web User Interface:...

  • Page 765: Action Uri

    “key” and variable value, which are separated by “=”. The valid http(s)://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?key=variable value URI format is: . For example: http://10.3.20.10/servlet?key=OK. Yealink IP phones are compatible with other two old valid URI formats: Note http(s)://<phoneIPAddress>/cgi-bin/ConfigManApp.com?key=variable value http(s)://<phoneIPAddress>/cgi-bin/cgiServer.exx?key=variable value SIP Notify Message In addition, Yealink IP phones support performing the specified action immediately by accepting a SIP NOTIFY message with the “Event: ACTION-URI”...
  • Page 766 NOTIFY sip:3583@10.2.40.10:5062 SIP/2.0 Via: SIP/2.0/UDP 10.2.40.27:5063;branch=z9hG4bK4163876675 From: <sip:3586@10.2.1.48>;tag=2900480538 To: "3583" <sip:3583@10.2.1.48>;tag=490600926 Call-ID: 2923387519@10.2.40.10 CSeq: 4 NOTIFY Contact: <sip:3586@10.2.40.27:5063> Max-Forwards: 70 User-Agent: Yealink SIP-T46G Event: ACTION-URI Content-Type: message/sipfrag Content-Length: 6 Message Body key=OK The following table lists pre-defined variable values: Variable Value Phone Action Press the OK/√...
  • Page 767 Reboot Reboot the phone. AutoP Perform auto provisioning. Activate the DND feature. Note: For Yealink IP phones (except CP860), it DNDOn works only if the value of the parameter “features.dnd.allow” is set to 1 (Enabled). Deactivate the DND feature. Note: For Yealink IP phones (except CP860), it...
  • Page 768 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Variable Value Phone Action For SIP- T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T42G/T 42S/T41P/T41S/T40P/T40G/T29G/T27P/T2 7G/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2 IP OFFHOOK phones: Pick up the handset. For CP860/CP920 IP phones: Press the off-hook key. For SIP- T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T42G/T 42S/T41P/T41S/T40P/T40G/T29G/T27P/T2 7G/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2 IP ONHOOK phones:...
  • Page 769 (n is the times of 6, e.g., 24). It is only applicable to no answer forward feature. AlwaysFwdOn/BusyFwdOn/NoAnswF Note: For Yealink IP phones (except CP860), it wdOn=xxx=n works only if the value of the parameter “features.fwd.allow” is set to 1 (Enabled) and...

  • Page 770: Configuring Trusted Ip Address For Action Uri

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Yealink IP phones also support a combination of the variable values in the URI, but the order of the variable value is determined by the operation of the phone. The valid URI format is: http(s)://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?key=variable value[;variable value]...
  • Page 771 Configuring Advanced Features Configure the IP phone to pop up the Allow Remote Control prompt. Parameter: features.show_action_uri_option Specify the trusted IP address(es) for sending the action URI to the IP phone. Parameter: features.action_uri_limit_ip Specify the trusted IP address(es) for sending the action URI to the IP phone.
  • Page 772 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default the “Event: ACTION-URI” header. The phone will directly perform the specified action. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “features.action_uri.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled).

  • Page 773: Scenario A - Capturing The Current Screen Of The Phone

    Configuring Advanced Features Multiple IP addresses are separated by commas. If you enter “any” in this field, the IP phone can receive and handle GET requests from any IP address. If you leave the field blank, the IP phone cannot receive or handle any HTTP GET request. Click Confirm to accept the change.

  • Page 774: Scenario B - Placing A Call Via Web User Interface

    Else, the browser will display an image showing the phone’s current screen directly. You can save the image to your local system. Frequent capture may affect the phone performance. Yealink recommend you to capture the Note phone screen display within a minimum interval of 4 seconds.

  • Page 775: Server Redundancy

    Configuring Advanced Features Enter the callee’s number in the Dial Number field. Click Dial to dial out the number. The web user interface prompts “Call Success” and the phone will automatically dial out the number. You can click Hang Up to end the call. If it is the first time you place a call via web user interface, the LCD screen will prompt the message “Allow remote control?”.
  • Page 776 Working Server: Server 1 is configured with the domain name of the working server. For example: yealink.pbx.com. DNS mechanism is used such that the working server is resolved to multiple servers with different IP addresses for failover purpose. The working server is deployed in redundant pairs, designated as primary and secondary servers.

  • Page 777: Phone Registration

    In a failure situation, the IP phone registers to the fallback server, and the fallback server can take over all calling capabilities. Server Redundancy on Yealink IP Phones. For more information on server redundancy, refer to Procedure Server redundancy can be configured using the following methods.
  • Page 778 Configures the IP address or domain name of the SIP server Y that accepts registrations for account X. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 779 (X ranges from 1 to 16, Y ranges from 1 to 2) Description: Configures the port of the SIP server Y that specifies registrations for account X. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 780 Configures the retry times for the IP phone to resend requests when the SIP server Y is unavailable or there is no response from the SIP server Y for account X. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S)
  • Page 781 If it is set to 1 (Enabled), the IP phone will register to the secondary server first, and then send the requests to it. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S)
  • Page 782 Configures the number of retries attempted before sending requests to the next available server for account X when encountering a failover. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 783 Description: Configures the IP address or domain name of the outbound proxy server Y for account X. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 784 Permitted Values Default 0-Concurrent Registration 1-Successive Registration X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) X is equal to 1 (for SIP-T19(P) E2/CP860/CP920) Note: It is not applicable to outbound proxy servers.
  • Page 785 X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 786 If you set the parameter from 1 to 59, the timeout will be 60 seconds. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S)
  • Page 787 If it is set to 1 (Enabled), the IP phone will immediately re-subscribe to the secondary server, for ensuring the normal use of the features associated with subscription (e.g., BLF, SCA). X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S)
  • Page 788 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Configure parameters of outbound proxy server 1 and outbound proxy server 2 in the corresponding fields. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure server redundancy for failover purpose via web user interface: Click on Account->Register.

  • Page 789: Server Domain Name Resolution

    A query. If no port is found through the DNS query, 5060 will be used. The following details the procedures of DNS query for the IP phone to resolve the domain name (e.g., yealink.pbx.com) of working server into the IP address, port and transport protocol. NAPTR (Naming Authority Pointer) First, the IP phone sends NAPTR query to get the NAPTR pointer and transport protocol.
  • Page 790 SRV query next. TCP will be used, targeted to a host determined by an SRV query of “_sip._tcp.yealink.pbx.com”. If the flag of the NAPTR record returned is empty, the IP phone will perform NAPTR query again according to the previous NAPTR query result.
  • Page 791 The two records also contain a port “5060”, the IP phone uses this port. If the Target is not a numeric IP address, the IP phone performs an A query. So in this case, the IP phone uses “server1.yealink.pbx.com" and “server2.yealink.pbx.com" for the A query. A (Host IP Address) The IP phone performs an A query for the IP address of each target host name.
  • Page 792 “account.X.sip_server.Y.address” is set to an IP address and the value of the parameter “account.X.sip_server.Y.port” is set to an explicit port (except 0), then UDP is used. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S)

  • Page 793: Static Dns Cache

    Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default None Phone User Interface: None Static DNS Cache Failover redundancy can only be utilized when the configured domain name of the server is resolved to multiple IP addresses. If the IP phone is not configured with a DNS server, or the DNS query returns no result from a DNS server, you can statically configure a set of DNS NAPTR/SRV/A records into the IP phone.
  • Page 794 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Procedure Static DNS cache can be configured only using the configuration files. Configure NAPTR/SRV/A records. Parameters: dns_cache_naptr.X.name dns_cache_naptr.X.flags dns_cache_naptr.X.order dns_cache_naptr.X.preference dns_cache_naptr.X.replace dns_cache_naptr.X.service dns_cache_naptr.X.ttl <y0000000000xx>.cfg dns_cache_srv.X.name dns_cache_srv.X.port dns_cache_srv.X.priority dns_cache_srv.X.target Central Provisioning dns_cache_srv.X.weight (Configuration File) dns_cache_srv.X.ttl...
  • Page 795 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Configures the domain name to which NAPTR record X refers. Example: dns_cache_naptr.1.name = yealink.pbx.com Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None dns_cache_naptr.X.flags S, A, U or P Blank (X ranges from 1 to 12) Description: Configures the flag of NAPTR record X.
  • Page 796 Blank prefix (X ranges from 1 to 12) Description: Configures a domain name to be used for the next SRV query in NAPTR record X. Example: dns_cache_naptr.1.replace = _sip._tcp.yealink.pbx.com Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None dns_cache_naptr.X.service String within 32...
  • Page 797 Domain name with SRV Blank prefix (X ranges from 1 to 12) Description: Configures the domain name in SRV record X. Example: dns_cache_srv.1.name = _sip._tcp.yealink.pbx.com Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None dns_cache_srv.X.port Integer from 0 to 65535 (X ranges from 1 to 12) Description: Configures the port to be used in SRV record X.
  • Page 798 Blank (X ranges from 1 to 12) Description: Configures the domain name of the target host for an A query in SRV record X. Example: dns_cache_srv.1.target = server1.yealink.pbx.com Note: For more information, refer to 2782. Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None dns_cache_srv.X.weight...
  • Page 799 None dns_cache_a.X.name Domain name Blank (X ranges from 1 to 12) Description: Configures the domain name in A record X. Example: dns_cache_a.1.name = yealink.pbx.com Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None dns_cache_a.X.ip IP address Blank (X ranges from 1 to 12) Description: Configures the IP address that the domain name in A record X maps to.
  • Page 800 1-Use DNS cache, but do not cache the additional DNS records. 2-Use DNS cache and cache the additional DNS records. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G)

  • Page 801: Real-Time Transport Protocol (Rtp) Ports

    X. 0-Use domain name resolution from the DNS server preferentially 1-Use static DNS cache preferentially X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 802 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Procedure RTP ports can be configured using the following methods. Configure RTP ports. Central Provisioning Parameters: <y0000000000xx>.cfg static.network.port.max_rtpport (Configuration File) static.network.port.min_rtpport Configure RTP ports. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =network-adv&q=load Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters...

  • Page 803: Tr-069 Device Management

    Configuring Advanced Features To configure the minimum and maximum RTP port via web user interface: Click on Network->Advanced. In the Local RTP Port block, enter the max and min RTP port in the Max RTP Port(1~65535) and Min RTP Port(1~65535) field respectively. Click Confirm to accept the change.
  • Page 804 This method is used to add a new instance of an object AddObject defined on the CPE. This method is used to remove a particular instance of DeleteObject an object. Yealink TR-069 Technote For more information on TR-069, refer to...
  • Page 805 Configuring Advanced Features Procedure TR-069 can be configured using the following methods. Configure TR-069 feature. Parameters: static.managementserver.enable static.managementserver.username Central static.managementserver.password Provisioning <y000000000 0xx>.cfg static.managementserver.url (Configuratio n File) static.managementserver.connection_request_username static.managementserver.connection_request_password static.managementserver.periodic_inform_enable static.managementserver.periodic_inform_interval Configure TR-069 feature. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=settings- tr069&q=load Details of Configuration Parameters: Permitted...
  • Page 806 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values Leave it blank if no authentication is required. Example: static.managementserver.username = tr69 Web User Interface: Settings->TR069->ACS Username Phone User Interface: None String static.managementserver.password within 64 Blank characters Description: Configures the password for the IP phone to authenticate with the ACS (Auto...
  • Page 807 Configuring Advanced Features Permitted Parameters Default Values Description: Configures the user name for the IP phone to authenticate the incoming connection requests of the ACS (Auto Configuration Servers). Example: static.managementserver.connection_request_username = accuser Web User Interface: Settings->TR069->Connection Request Username Phone User Interface: None String static.managementserver.connection_request_password...
  • Page 808 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values 429496729 Description: Configures the interval (in seconds) for the IP phone to report its configuration to the ACS (Auto Configuration Servers). Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “static.managementserver.periodic_inform_enable”...

  • Page 809: Xml Browser

    Google search, news service, etc. To use the XML browser feature, you must configure an XML key in advance. Yealink IP Phones XML Browser Developer's For more information on XML browser, refer to...
  • Page 810 The digit 27 stands for the key type XML Browser. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 811 For SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2 IP phones: The default value is 15. For programable keys: For SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S IP phones: When X=1, the default value is 28 (History). When X=2, the default value is 61 (Directory). When X=3, the default value is 5 (DND).
  • Page 812 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default For SIP-T29G/T27P/T27G IP phones: When X=1, the default value is 28 (History). When X=2, the default value is 61 (Directory). When X=3, the default value is 5 (DND). When X=4, the default value is 30 (Menu).
  • Page 813 Configures the available access URL to browser the XML object. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 814 (Optional.) Configures the label displayed on the LCD screen for each DSS key. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 815 Permitted Values Default X ranges from 1 to 4. For ext keys: For SIP-T54S/T52S: X ranges from 1 to 3, Y ranges from 1 to 60. For SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S: X ranges from 1 to 6, Y ranges from 1 to 40.

  • Page 816: Enhanced Dss Keys

    For more information, refer to Understanding Macro Action Strings on page 791. Using Enhanced DSS Keys on Yealink IP For more information on Enhanced DSS Keys, refer to Phones Some Guidelines for Configuring Enhanced DSS Keys The following guidelines will help you to configure EDK efficiently: Activation of EDK functions requires valid macro construction.

  • Page 817: Understanding Macro Action Strings

    Configuring Advanced Features Understanding Macro Action Strings Before using EDK, you must be familiar with macro language shown in this section. The following table shows the basic macro action string syntax when creating EDK macros: Macro Action Description The digits to be sent. You can use only *, #, +, 0-9. The appearance of this parameter depends on the action Digits string.
  • Page 818 The softkey ID is case-insensitive. Example: $Sanswer$ means pressing the Answer soft key. Yealink IP phones support customizing soft keys. When invoking a custom soft key, the prefix “#” must be added. Example: If the custom softkey label is IVR1, the custom softkey id is custom_macro, then $S#custom_macro$ means pressing the IVR1 soft key.
  • Page 819 For SIP-T48S/T48G/T46S/T46G/T29G: X ranges from 1 to 40, Y ranges from 1 to 6; For SIP-T54S/T52S: X ranges from 1 to 60, Y ranges from 1 to 3; @Y can be omitted if there is only one expansion module connected to the phone.)
  • Page 820 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Macro Action Description the phone is idle. The user input prompt string. Enable to prompt the pop- up box, specify the label for the input box, specify the maximum input characters, specify the character type for the input box, and specify whether to mask the input by the “*”.

  • Page 821: Configuring Edk Feature

    By default, the EDK feature is disabled. Yealink IP phones support displaying the softkey id or menu item id by long pressing the Volume Up key. It is especially useful for those users who need to view the softkey id or menu...
  • Page 822 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones The following graphic shows an example for displaying the softkey id and menu item id after accessing the menu of the phone: Procedure EDK feature can be configured using the configuration files. Configure enhanced DSS keys.

  • Page 823: Configuring Edk List

    Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Enables or disables to view the softkey id or menu item id by long pressing the Volume Up key. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled If it is set to 1 (Enabled), you can view the softkey id or menu item id by long pressing the Volume Up key for three seconds at any interface.
  • Page 824 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “features.enhanced_dss_keys.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled). Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None edk.edklist.X.mname String Blank...

  • Page 825: Configuring Edk Prompt

    Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: None Configuring EDK Prompt The Enhanced DSS Keys (EDK) Prompt parameters must be used if interactivity with user is implemented as part of any macro. Procedure EDK prompt can be configured using the configuration files. Configure EDK prompt.
  • Page 826 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the prompt text to be displayed on the Enhanced DSS Keys (EDK) prompt X screen. If it is left blank, no prompt displays. Example: edk.edkprompt.1.label = Enter Password Note: It works only if the values of the parameters “features.enhanced_dss_keys.enable”...

  • Page 827: Configuring Edk Soft Keys

    Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default mask password fields. Example: edk.edkprompt.1.userfeedback = masked Note: It works only if the values of the parameters “features.enhanced_dss_keys.enable” and “edk.edkprompt.X.enable” are set to 1 (Enabled). Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None Configuring EDK Soft Keys The soft keys can be used by the system administrator to customize the use of the soft keys on the phone to suit users’...
  • Page 828 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Configuring the custom soft keys may affect the softkey layout in different states. For more information, refer to Softkey Layout on page 287. Procedure Soft keys can be configured using the configuration files. Configure a custom soft key.
  • Page 829 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None softkey.X.label String Blank (X ranges from 1 to 10) Description: Configures the text displayed on the soft key label. Example: softkey.1.label = IVR1 Note: It works only if the values of the parameters “features.enhanced_dss_keys.enable” and “softkey.X.enable”...
  • Page 830 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default (X ranges from 1 to 10) Description: Configures the action or function for custom soft key X. This value uses the same macro action string syntax as an Enhanced DSS key. You can also invoke the EDK macro that was already defined.
  • Page 831 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Enables or disables the custom soft key X to be displayed in the idle state. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It works only if the values of the parameters “features.enhanced_dss_keys.enable” and “softkey.X.enable” are set to 1 (Enabled). Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 832 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default softkey.X.use.transfer_connecting 0 or 1 (X ranges from 1 to 10) Description: Enables or disables the custom soft key X to be displayed in the transfer connecting state. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It works only if the values of the parameters “features.enhanced_dss_keys.enable”...
  • Page 833 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: None softkey.X.use.ring_back 0 or 1 (X ranges from 1 to 10) Description: Enables or disables the custom soft key X to be displayed in the ring back state. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It works only if the values of the parameters “features.enhanced_dss_keys.enable”...
  • Page 834 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default and “softkey.X.enable” are set to 1 (Enabled). Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None softkey.X.use.held 0 or 1 (X ranges from 1 to 10) Description: Enables or disables the custom soft key X to be displayed in the held state.

  • Page 835: Configuring A Custom Key

    Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default entered) state. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It works only if the values of the parameters “features.enhanced_dss_keys.enable” and “softkey.X.enable” are set to 1 (Enabled). Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None softkey.X.use.dialing 0 or 1 (X ranges from 1 to 10) Description: Enables or disables the custom soft key X to be displayed in the dialing state.
  • Page 836 The digit 73 stands for the key type Custom Key. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 837 The default value of the line key 1-16 is 15, and the default value of the line key 17-29 is 0. For SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G IP phones: The default value of the line key 1-16 is 15, and the default value of the line key 17-27 is 0.
  • Page 838 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default When X=10, the default value is 0 (NA). When X=12, the default value is 0 (NA). When X=13, the default value is 0 (NA). When X=14, the default value is 2 (Forward). For SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S/T40P/T40G IP phones: When X=1, the default value is 28 (History).
  • Page 839 When X=9, the default value is 33 (Status). When X=13, the default value is 0 (NA). For ext keys: For SIP-T54S/T52S IP phones: When Y=1-60, the default value is 0 (NA). For SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S IP phones: When Y= 1 to 40, the default value is 0 (NA).
  • Page 840 EDK macro. The macro name follows the character “!”. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 841 (Optional.) Configures the label displayed on the LCD screen for each DSS key. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 842 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->DSS Keys->Line Key X->Label linekey.X.shortlabel String within 99 Blank characters (X ranges from 1 to 21) Description: (Optional.) Configures the short label displayed on the LCD screen for line key. Note: It is only applicable to SIP-T52S IP phones.

  • Page 843: Example Macros

    Configuring Advanced Features Example Macros Macros can be applied to various scenarios. The following takes an example to help you understand how to execute the macro action string. Scenario Operations: Add/Edit the following parameters in the y000000000028.cfg file or <MAC>.cfg (e.g., 001565770984.cfg) file you want the IP phone to download: features.enhanced_dss_keys.enable = 1 edk.edklist.1.enable = 1...
  • Page 844 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones The action string 1013$Tinvite$$Cwc$$Cp10$$Penter number&C4&N$$Tdtmf$$Cp3$$Chu$ is executed in order as follows: A prompt appears on the LCD screen. Enter a number for up to 4 digits. For example, 1234. Press the OK soft key to continue. The IP phone places a call to 1013 using the default account, and then waits for connection.

  • Page 845: Configuring Audio Features

    Configuring Audio Features Configuring Audio Features This chapter provides information for making configuration changes for the following audio features: Redial Tone  Ring Tones  Distinctive Ring Tones  Tones  Voice Mail Tone  Ringer Device for Headset  Handset/Headset/Speakerphone Mode ...

  • Page 846: Ring Tones

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameter Permitted Values Default features.redial_tone Integer within 6 digits Blank Description: Configures the IP phone to continue to play the dial tone after inputting the preset numbers on the dialing screen. Example: features.redial_tone = 123 The IP phone will continue to play the dial tone after inputting “123”...
  • Page 847 Configuring Audio Features The ring tone format must meet the following: Phone Model Format Single File Size Note SIP- 2MB of space should be T54S/T52S/T48S/T46S/T42S/T41 .wav <=8MB reserved for the phone S/T27G 2.4MB of space should SIP-T48G/T46G/T29G .wav <=8MB be reserved for the phone) SIP- 5KB of space should be...
  • Page 848 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Upload the custom ring tones. Configure a ring tone for the IP phone. Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=setti ngs-preference&q=load Web User Interface Configure a ring tone on a per-line basis. Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=acco unt-basic&q=load&acc=0 Configure a ring tone for the IP phone.
  • Page 849 It means account1 will use the ring tone selected for the IP phone configured by the parameter “phone_setting.ring_type”. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 850 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the access URL of the custom ring tone file. Example: ringtone.url = tftp://192.168.1.100/Customring.wav Web User Interface: Settings->Preference->Upload Ringtone Phone User Interface: None ringtone.delete http://localhost/all Blank Description: Delete all custom ring tone files.
  • Page 851 Configuring Audio Features To change the ring tone for the phone via web user interface: Click on Settings->Preference. Select the desired ring tone from the pull-down list of Ring Type. Click Confirm to accept the change. To change the ring tone for the account via web user interface: Click on Account->Basic.

  • Page 852: Touch Tone

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Press to select the desired account and then press the Enter soft key. Press to select the desired ring tone. If Common is selected, this account will use the ring tone selected for the phone. Press the Save soft key to accept the change.

  • Page 853: Distinctive Ring Tones

    Configuring Audio Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Menu->Basic->Sound->Touch Tone To configure touch tone via web user interface: Click on Features->Audio. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Touch Tone. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure touch tone via phone user interface: Tap Menu->Settings->Basic Settings ->Sound->Touch Tone.
  • Page 854 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones The following table identifies the corresponding ring tone: Ring Tone Ring Tone Value of N (features.alert_info_tone = 1) (features.alert_info_tone = 0) Bellcore-dr1 Ring1.wav Bellcore-dr2 Ring2.wav Bellcore-dr3 Ring3.wav Bellcore-dr4 Ring4.wav Bellcore-dr5 Ring5.wav Ring6.wav Ring7.wav...
  • Page 855 Configuring Audio Features Minimum Nominal Maximum Pattern Cade Bellcore Tone Pattern Duration Duration Duration (ms) (ms) (ms) Ringing Short Silent Ringing Short Bellcore-dr3 Silent Ringing Long 1025 Silent 2975 4000 4400 Ringing Short Silent Ringing Long 1000 1100 Bellcore-dr4 Silent Ringing Short Silent...
  • Page 856 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones The following table identifies the corresponding local ring tone: Value of N Ring Tone Ring1.wav Ring2.wav Ring3.wav Ring4.wav Ring5.wav Ring6.wav Ring7.wav Ring8.wav Silent.wav Splash.wav N<1 or N>10 Ring1.wav Alert-Info: <URL> When the Alert-Info header contains a remote URL, the IP phone will try to download the WAV ring tone file from the URL and then play the remote ring tone if the value of the parameter “account.X.alert_info_url_enable”...
  • Page 857 Configuring Audio Features Auto Answer If the INVITE request contains the following type of strings, the IP phone will answer incoming calls automatically without playing the ring tone: Alert-Info: Auto Answer  Alert-Info: info = alert-autoanswer  Alert-Info: answer-after = 0 (or Alert-Info: Answer-After = 0) ...
  • Page 858 Enables or disables the IP phone to download the ring tone from the URL contained in the Alert-Info header for account X. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G)
  • Page 859 Configuring Audio Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: Settings->Ring->Internal Ringer Text Phone User Interface: None distinctive_ring_tones.alert_info.X.ringer Integer from 1 to 10 (X ranges from 1 to 10) Description: Configures the desired ring tones for each internal ringer text. The value ranges from 1 to 10, the digit stands for the appropriate ring tone.

  • Page 860: Tones

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Distinctive Ring Tones. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure the internal ringer text and internal ringer file via web user interface: Click on Settings->Ring.
  • Page 861 Configuring Audio Features phones: Australia  Austria  Brazil  Belgium  China  Czech  Denmark  Finland  France  Germany  Great Britain  Greece  Hungary  Lithuania  India  Italy  Japan  Mexico ...
  • Page 862 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Condition Description Ring Back Ring-back tone Busy When the callee is busy Congestion When the network is congested Call waiting tone (For more information on call Call Waiting waiting, refer to Call Waiting) Dial Recall...
  • Page 863 Configuring Audio Features http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet? p=settings-tones&q=load Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default voice.tone.country Refer to the following content Custom Description: Configures the country tone for the IP phone. Permitted Values: Custom, Australia, Austria, Brazil, Belgium, Chile, China, Czech, Czech ETSI, Denmark, Finland, France, Germany, Great Britain, Greece, Hungary, Lithuania, India, Italy, Japan, Mexico, New Zealand, Netherlands, Norway, Portugal, Spain, Switzerland, Sweden, Russia, United States.
  • Page 864 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default commas. (e.g., 250/200,0/1000,200+300/500,200+500+800+1500/1000). If you want the IP phone to play tones once, add an exclamation mark “!” before tones (e.g., !250/200,0/1000,200+300/500,200+500+800+1500/1000). Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “voice.tone.country” is set to Custom. If you want to disable this warning tone, set it to 0.
  • Page 865 Configuring Audio Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Customizes the tone when the callee is busy. The value format is Freq/Duration. For more information on the value format, refer to the parameter “voice.tone.dial”. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “voice.tone.country” is set to Custom. If you want to disable this warning tone, set it to 0.
  • Page 866 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default voice.tone.dialrecall String Blank Description: Customizes the call back tone. The value format is Freq/Duration. For more information on the value format, refer to the parameter “voice.tone.dial”. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “voice.tone.country”...
  • Page 867 Configuring Audio Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: None voice.tone.message String Blank Description: Customizes the tone when the IP phone receives a text message. The value format is Freq/Duration. For more information on the value format, refer to the parameter “voice.tone.dial”.

  • Page 868: Voice Mail Tone

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones If you select Custom, you can customize a tone for each condition of the IP phone. Click Confirm to accept the change. Voice Mail Tone Voice mail tone feature allows the IP phone to play a warning tone when receiving a new voice mail.
  • Page 869 Configuring Audio Features Parameter Permitted Values Default Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to play a warning tone when it receives a new voice mail. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Web User Interface: Features->General Information->Voice Mail Tone Phone User Interface: None To configure voice mail tone via web user interface: Click on Features->General Information.

  • Page 870: Ringer Device For Headset

    Bluetooth headset) should be connected to the IP phone and the headset mode also should be activated in advance. You can press the HEADSET key to activate the headset mode. For Yealink phone-specific user guide more information, refer to the It is not applicable to CP860/CP920 IP phones.
  • Page 871 Configuring Audio Features Parameter Permitted Values Default the parameter “features.speaker_mode.enable” to 1 (Enabled). If you want to user headset ringer device for the phone, you have to set the value of the parameter “features.headset_mode.enable” to 1 (Enabled). It is not applicable to CP860/CP920 IP phones.

  • Page 872: Handset/Headset/Speakerphone Mode

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Handset/Headset/Speakerphone Mode Yealink IP phones support three ways to place/answer a call: using the handset, using the headset or using the speakerphone. You can disable the least frequently used audio device as required.

  • Page 873: Headset Prior

    Configuring Audio Features Parameters Permitted Values Default 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It is not applicable to CP860/CP920 IP phones. Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None features.headset_mode.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the phone’s headset jack. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It is not applicable to CP860/CP920 IP phones.
  • Page 874 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones http://<phoneIPAddress>/servl et?p=features-general&q=load Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default features.headset_prior 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables headset prior feature. You need to press the HEADSET key to activate the headset mode in advance.

  • Page 875: Dual Headset

    Configuring Audio Features Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Headset Prior. Click Confirm to accept the change. Dual Headset Dual headset allows users to use two headsets on one IP phone. To use this feature, users need to physically connect two headsets to the headset and handset jacks respectively.
  • Page 876 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default features.headset_training 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables dual headset feature. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled If it is set to 1 (Enabled), users can use two headsets on one phone. When the IP phone joins in a call, the users with the headset connected to the headset jack have a full-duplex conversation, while the users with the headset connected to the handset jack are only allowed to listen to.

  • Page 877: Sending Volume

    Configuring Audio Features Sending Volume Sending volume allows user to adjust the sending volume of currently engaged audio devices (handset, speakerphone or headset) when the phone is in use. Procedure Sending volume can be configured using the following methods. Configure the sending volume of the speaker.
  • Page 878 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: None voice.handset_send Integer from -50 to 50 Description: Configures the sending volume of the handset. Note: It is not applicable to CP860/CP920 IP phones. We recommend that you modify this parameter cautiously.

  • Page 879: Ringer Volume

    You can configure the ringer volume forcedly, so the user cannot adjust the ringer volume on the phone. This feature is used to avoid missing calls when the user turns down the ringer volume. It is not applicable to SIP-T54S/T52S/CP860 IP phones. Procedure Ringer volume can be configured using the following method.

  • Page 880: Audio Codecs

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default None Phone User Interface: None Audio Codecs CODEC is an abbreviation of COmpress-DECompress, capable of coding or decoding a digital data stream or signal by implementing an algorithm. The object of the algorithm is to represent the high-fidelity audio signal with minimum number of bits while retaining the quality.

  • Page 881: Audio Codecs On

    The SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2 IP phones support using WB for opus encoding; and using NB, MB, WB, SWB and FB for opus decoding. The SIP-T54S/T52S/T48S/T46S/T42S/T41S/T27G IP phones support using WB (default) or NB for opus encoding; and using NB, MB, WB, SWB and FB for opus decoding.
  • Page 882 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Sample Packetization Codec Algorithm Reference Bit Rate Rate Time 13.33 Kbps 30ms 16 Kbps 8 Ksps opus opus RFC 6716 20ms 20 Kbps 16 Ksps The network bandwidth necessary to send the encoded audio is typically 5~10% higher than the Note bit rate due to packetization overhead.
  • Page 883 T27G/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP920) Audio Codec Configuration Yealink IP phones running firmware version 81 or later support a new configuration behavior for the audio codecs. It is more efficiently for you to provision a number of different IP phone modules. The configuration parameters are different for the new configuration behavior and the older one.
  • Page 884 Enables or disables the specified audio codec for account X. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G)
  • Page 885 Configuring Audio Features Permitted Parameters Default Values G722_1c_48, G722_1c_32, G722_1c_24, G722_1_24, G722, PCMA, PCMU, G729, G726-16, G726-24, G726-32, G726-40, iLBC, G723_53, G723_63, opus Default: When audio codec is G.722_1c_48, the default value is 1; When audio codec is G.722_1c_32, the default value is 1; When audio codec is G.722_1c_24, the default value is 1;...
  • Page 886 Description: Configures the priority of the enabled audio codec for account X. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 887 Configuring Audio Features Permitted Parameters Default Values When audio codec is PCMU, the default value is 2; When audio codec is PCMA, the default value is 3; When audio codec is G729, the default value is 4; When audio codec is G726_16, the default value is 0; When audio codec is G726_24, the default value is 0;...
  • Page 888 Description: Configures the rtpmap of the audio codec for account X. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 889 Phone User Interface: None opus-fb to Refer to the account.X.codec.opus.para opus-nb following content Description: Configures the sample rate of the opus audio codec for account X. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48S/T46S) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42S)
  • Page 890 (48KHz) opus-swb-Opus-SWB (24KHz) opus-wb-Opus-WB (16KHz) opus-mb-Opus-MB (12KHz) opus-nb-Opus-NB (8KHz) The default value is opus-fb. Note: It is only applicable to SIP-T54S/T52S/T48S/T46S/T42S/T41S/T27G/CP920 IP phones. Web User Interface: Account->Codec->Opus Sample Rate Phone User Interface: None To configure the codecs to use and adjust the priority of the enabled codecs via web user interface: Click on Account->Codec.
  • Page 891 Configuring Audio Features To adjust the priority of codecs, select the desired codec and then click Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure the opus sample rate via web user interface (take SIP-T54S IP phones for example: Click on Account->Codec.
  • Page 892 Enables or disables the specified audio codec for account X. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G)
  • Page 893 X is equal to 1 (for SIP-T19(P) E2/CP860) Y ranges from 1 to 16 (for CP920) Y ranges from 1 to 12 (SIP-T54S/T52S/T48S/T46S/T42S/T41S/T27G) Y ranges from 1 to 11 (for SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T29G/CP860) Y ranges from 1 to 10 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2)
  • Page 894 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values When Y=3, the default value is 1; When Y=4, the default value is 1; When Y=5, the default value is 0; When Y=6, the default value is 0; When Y=7, the default value is 0;...
  • Page 895 Description: Configures the audio codec for account X. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G)
  • Page 896 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values When Y=12, the default value is opus; For SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T29G/CP860: When Y=1, the default value is PCMU; When Y=2, the default value is PCMA; When Y=3, the default value is G723_53; When Y=4, the default value is G723_63;...
  • Page 897 (X ranges from 1 to 16, Y ranges from 1 to 12) Description: Configures the priority of the enabled audio codec for account X. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 898 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values When Y=1, the default value is 2; When Y=2, the default value is 3; When Y=3, the default value is 0; When Y=4, the default value is 0; When Y=5, the default value is 4;...
  • Page 899 Configuring Audio Features Permitted Parameters Default Values When Y=10, the default value is 0; When Y=11, the default value is 0; For SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2: When Y=1, the default value is 2; When Y=2, the default value is 3; When Y=3, the default value is 4; When Y=4, the default value is 1;...
  • Page 900 Values Description: Configures the rtpmap of the audio codec for account X. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G)
  • Page 901 Configuring Audio Features Permitted Parameters Default Values When Y=9, the default value is 105; When Y=10, the default value is 107; When Y=11, the default value is 4; When Y=12, the default value is 4; For SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T29G/CP860: When Y=1, the default value is 0; When Y=2, the default value is 8;...

  • Page 902: Packetization Time (Ptime)

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values When Y=8, the default value is 102; When Y=9, the default value is 105; Example: account.1.codec.1.rtpmap = 0 Note: It is only applicable to the IP phones running firmware version 81 or prior. Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 903 Configuring Audio Features The following table summarizes the valid values of ptime for each audio codec: Packetization Time Codec Packetization Time (Maximun) (Minimun) G.722.1c 20ms 60ms G.722.1c 20ms 60ms G.722.1c 20ms 60ms G.722.1 20ms 60ms G722 10ms 40ms 10ms 40ms PCMA 10ms 40ms...
  • Page 904 50-50 60-60 If it is set to 0 (Disabled), the ptime negotiation is disabled. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G)

  • Page 905: Acoustic Clarity Technology

    Configuring Audio Features Select the desired value from the pull-down list of PTime(ms). Click Confirm to accept the change. Acoustic Clarity Technology Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC) Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC) is used to reduce acoustic echo from a voice call to provide natural full-duplex communication patterns.

  • Page 906: Background Noise Suppression (Bns)

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Configure AEC. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/serv let?p=settings-voice&q=load Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default voice.echo_cancellation 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the AEC (Acoustic Echo Canceller) feature on the IP phone. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Web User Interface:...

  • Page 907: Automatic Gain Control (Agc)

    Configuring Audio Features Automatic Gain Control (AGC) Automatic Gain Control (AGC) is applicable to hands-free operation and is used to keep audio output at nearly a constant level by adjusting the gain of signals in certain circumstances. This increases the effective user-phone radius and helps with the intelligibility of soft-talkers. Voice Activity Detection (VAD) Voice Activity Detection (VAD) is used in speech processing to detect the presence or absence of human speech.

  • Page 908: Comfort Noise Generation (Cng)

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones To configure VAD via web user interface: Click on Settings->Voice. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of VAD. Click Confirm to accept the change. Comfort Noise Generation (CNG) Comfort Noise Generation (CNG) is used to generate background noise for voice communications during periods of silence in a conversation.
  • Page 909 Configuring Audio Features Procedure CNG can be configured using the following methods. Configure CNG. Central Provisioning <y0000000000xx>.cfg Parameter: (Configuration File) voice.cng Configure CNG. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet? p=settings-voice&q=load Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default voice.cng 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the CNG (Comfortable Noise Generation) feature on the IP phone.

  • Page 910: Jitter Buffer On

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Click Confirm to accept the change. Jitter Buffer Jitter buffer is a shared data area where voice packets can be collected, stored, and sent to the voice processor in even intervals. Jitter is a term indicating variations in packet arrival time, which can occur because of network congestion, timing drift or route changes.
  • Page 911 Configuring Audio Features Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default voice.jib.adaptive 0 or 1 Description: Configures the type of jitter buffer in the wired network. 0-Fixed 1-Adaptive Web User Interface: Settings->Voice->JITTER BUFFER->Type Phone User Interface: None voice.jib.min Integer from 0 to 400 Description: Configures the minimum delay time (in milliseconds) of jitter buffer in the wired network.
  • Page 912 Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “voice.jib.wifi.adaptive” is set to 1 (Adaptive). The value of the minimum delay time should be less than or equal to that of the normal delay time (configured by the parameter “voice.jib.wifi.normal”). It is only applicable to SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T42S/T41S/T29G/T27G/CP920 IP phones. Web User Interface:...
  • Page 913 Configuring Audio Features Parameters Permitted Values Default network. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “voice.jib.wifi.adaptive” is set to 1 (Adaptive). It is only applicable to SIP- T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T42S/T41S/T29G/T27G/CP920 IP phones. Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None voice.jib.wifi.normal Integer from 0 to 500...

  • Page 914: Noise Suppression

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones The valid value ranges from 20 to 300. Click Confirm to accept the change. Noise Proof Noise Suppression The impact noise in the room are picked-up, including paper rustling, coffee mugs, coughing, typing, and silverware striking plates.

  • Page 915: Smart Noise Block

    Configuring Audio Features Parameter Permitted Values Default Description: Enables or disables the Noise Suppression feature on the IP phones. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It is only applicable to CP920 IP phones. Web User Interface: Settings->Voice->Noise Proof-> Noise Suppression Phone User Interface: None To configure Noise Suppression via web user interface: Click on Settings->Voice.

  • Page 916: Dtmf

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m= mod_data&p=settings-voice&q=load Details of Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default voice.ans_nb.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the Smart Noise Block feature on the IP phones. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “voice.tns.enable”...

  • Page 917: Methods Of Transmitting Dtmf Digit On

    Configuring Audio Features signaling over analog telephone lines in the voice-frequency band. DTMF is the signal sent from the IP phone to the network, which is generated when pressing the IP phone’s keypad during a call. Each key pressed on the IP phone generates one sinusoidal tone of two frequencies.
  • Page 918 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones codec as your voice and is audible to conversation partners. SIP INFO DTMF digits are transmitted by the SIP INFO messages when the voice stream is established after a successful SIP 200 OK-ACK message sequence. The SIP INFO message is sent along the signaling path of the call.
  • Page 919 If it is set to 3 (RFC2833 + SIP INFO), DTMF digits are transmitted by RTP Events compliant to RFC 2833 and the SIP INFO messages. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S)
  • Page 920 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G)
  • Page 921 Configuring Audio Features Parameters Permitted Values Default an active call. Web User Interface: Features->General Information->DTMF Repetition Phone User Interface: None Integer from 0 to features.dtmf.duration Description: Configures the duration time (in milliseconds) for each digit when a sequence of DTMF tones is played out automatically.
  • Page 922 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: None To configure the method of transmitting DTMF digits via web user interface: Click on Account->Advanced. Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of DTMF Type.

  • Page 923: Suppress Dtmf Display

    Configuring Audio Features Click Confirm to accept the change. Suppress DTMF Display Suppress DTMF display allows IP phones to suppress the display of DTMF digits during an active call. DTMF digits are displayed as “*” on the LCD screen. Suppress DTMF display delay defines whether to display the DTMF digits for a short period of time before displaying as “*”.

  • Page 924: Transfer Via Dtmf

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to display the DTMF digits for a short period before displaying asterisks during an active call. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “features.dtmf.hide” is set to 1 (Enabled). Web User Interface: Features->General Information->Suppress DTMF Display Delay Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 925 Configuring Audio Features Procedure Configuration changes can be performed using the following methods. Configure transfer via DTMF. Central Provisioning Parameters: <y0000000000xx>.cfg features.dtmf.replace_tran (Configuration File) features.dtmf.transfer Configure transfer via DTMF. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet? p=features-general&q=load Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default...

  • Page 926: Dtmf Send Event Flash

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default features.dtmf.transfer = 123 Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “features.dtmf.replace_tran” is set to 1 (Enabled). Web User Interface: Features->General Information->Tran Send DTMF Phone User Interface: None To configure transfer via DTMF via web user interface:...
  • Page 927 Configuring Audio Features Event encoding (decimal) 12-15 Flash The following figure shows the Flash event sent by the IP phone when transmitting DTMF digit using the RFC 2833 DTMF type: Procedure Configuration changes can be performed using the configuration files. Configure DTMF send event flash feature.

  • Page 928: Play Local Dtmf Tone

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameter Permitted Values Default 1-Enabled If it is set to 0 (Disabled), the letter E will be transmitted as DTMF D. If it is set to 1 (Enabled), the letter E will be transmitted as DTMF Flash. Note: If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect.

  • Page 929: Voice Quality Monitoring (Vqm)

    These metrics can be sent between the phones in RTCP-XR packets. These metrics can also be sent in SIP PUBLISH messages to a central voice quality report collector. Two mechanisms for voice quality monitoring are supported by Yealink IP phones: RTCP-XR ...

  • Page 930: Rtcp-Xr

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones RTCP-XR The RTCP-XR mechanism, compliant with RFC 3611-RTP Control Extended Reports (RTCP XR), provides the metrics contained in RTCP-XR packets for monitoring the quality of calls. These metrics include network packet loss, delay metrics, analog metrics and voice quality metrics. Procedure RTCP-XR can be configured using the following methods.

  • Page 931: Vq-Rtcpxr

    Configuring Audio Features Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Voice RTCP-XR Report. Click Confirm to accept the change. A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot. Click OK to reboot the phone. VQ-RTCPXR The VQ-RTCPXR mechanism, compliant with 6035, sends the service quality metric reports...
  • Page 932 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones VQ-RTCPXR can be configured using the following methods. Configure the generation of session packets. Parameter: phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr.session_report.enable Configure the generation of interval packets. Parameters: phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr.interval_report.enable phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_interval_period Configure the generation of alert packets. Parameters: phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_moslq_threshold_warning Central...
  • Page 933 Configuring Audio Features Configure the options of the RTP status displayed on the phone user interface. Parameters: phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_display_start_time.enable phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_display_stop_time.enable phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_display_local_call_id.enable phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_display_remote_call_id.ena phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_display_local_codec.enable phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_display_remote_codec.enab phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_display_jitter.enable phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_display_jitter_buffer_max.e nable phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_display_packets_lost.enable phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_display_symm_oneway_del ay.enable phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_display_round_trip_delay.e nable phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_display_moslq.enable phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_display_moscq.enable Configure the central report collector. Parameters: <MAC>.cfg account.X.vq_rtcpxr.collector_name account.X.vq_rtcpxr.collector_server_host account.X.vq_rtcpxr.collector_server_port...
  • Page 934 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones voicemonitoring&q=load Configure the central report collector. Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=account- adv&q=load&acc=0 Details of Configuration Parameters: Permitted Parameters Default Values phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr.session_report.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to send a session quality report to the central report collector at the end of each call.
  • Page 935 Configuring Audio Features Permitted Parameters Default Values Phone User Interface: None Integer phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_interval_period from 5 to Description: Configures the interval (in seconds) for the IP phone to send an interval quality report to the central report collector periodically throughout a call. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr.interval_report.enable”...
  • Page 936 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values 15 to 40 Blank phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_moslq_threshold_critical Description: Configures the threshold value of listening MOS score (MOS-LQ) multiplied by 10. The threshold value of MOS-LQ causes the phone to send a critical alert quality report to the central report collector.
  • Page 937 Configuring Audio Features Permitted Parameters Default Values a critical alert quality report to the central report collector. For example, If it is set to 500, when the value of one way delay computed by the phone is greater than or equal to 500, the phone will send a critical alert quality report to the central report collector;...
  • Page 938 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_display_start_time.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the phone to display Start Time on the LCD screen. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr.states_show_on_gui.enable”...
  • Page 939 Configuring Audio Features Permitted Parameters Default Values None phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_display_remote_call_id.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the phone to display Remote User on the LCD screen. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr.states_show_on_gui.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled). Web User Interface: Settings->Voice Monitoring->Report options on phone->Remote User Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 940 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr.states_show_on_gui.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled). Web User Interface: Settings->Voice Monitoring->Report options on phone->Remote Codec Phone User Interface: None phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_display_jitter.enable 0 or 1...
  • Page 941 Configuring Audio Features Permitted Parameters Default Values Description: Enables or disables the phone to display Packets Lost on the LCD screen. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr.states_show_on_gui.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled). Web User Interface: Settings->Voice Monitoring->Report options on phone->Packets Lost Phone User Interface: None...
  • Page 942 Configures the host name of the central report collector that accepts voice quality reports contained in SIP PUBLISH messages for account X. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 943 Configures the IP address of the central report collector that accepts voice quality reports contained in SIP PUBLISH messages for account X. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 944 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values Phone User Interface: None To configure session report for VQ-RTCPXR via web user interface: Click on Settings->Voice Monitoring. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of VQ RTCP-XR Session Report. Click Confirm to accept the change.
  • Page 945 Configuring Audio Features Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure alert report for VQ-RTCPXR via web user interface: Click on Settings->Voice Monitoring. Enter the desired value in the Warning threshold for Moslq field. Enter the desired value in the Critical threshold for Moslq field. Enter the desired value in the Warning threshold for Delay field.
  • Page 946 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones The RTP status will appear on the web user interface at the path: Status->RTP Status. To configure RTP status displayed on the LCD screen via web user interface: Click on Settings->Voice Monitoring. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Display Report options on phone.
  • Page 947 Configuring Audio Features The selected list appears in the Enabled column. Repeat the step 2 to add more items to the Enabled column. To remove an item from the Enabled column, select the desired item and then click To adjust the display order of enabled items, select the desired item and then click The LCD screen will display the item(s) in the adjusted order.
  • Page 948 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Enter the port of the central report collector in the VQ RTCP-XR Collector Port field. Click Confirm to accept the change.

  • Page 949: Configuring Security Features

    Configuring Security Features Configuring Security Features This chapter provides information for making configuration changes for the following security- related features: User and Administrator Passwords  Auto Logout Time  Phone Lock  Transport Layer Security (TLS)  Secure Real-Time Transport Protocol (SRTP) ...
  • Page 950 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones password of the IP phone. Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default static.security.user_password String within 32 characters user Description: Configures the password of the user or administrator for phone’s web user interface access. The IP phone uses “user”...

  • Page 951: Auto Logout Time

    Configuring Security Features Click Confirm to accept the change. If logging into the web user interface of the phone with the user credential, you need to enter Note the old user password in the Old Password field. To change the administrator password via phone user interface: Press Menu->Advanced (default password: admin) ->Change Password.

  • Page 952: Phone Lock

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameter Permitted Values Default Note: If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect. Web User Interface: Features->General Information->Auto Logout Time(1~1000min) Phone User Interface: None To configure the auto logout time via web user interface: Click on Features->General Information.
  • Page 953 Configuring Security Features Procedure Phone lock can be configured using the following methods. Configure the phone lock type. Parameters: phone_setting.phone_lock.enable phone_setting.phone_lock.lock_key_type Change the unlock PIN. Parameter: phone_setting.phone_lock.unlock_pin Configure the IP phone to automatically lock the phone after a time interval. Central Parameter: Provisioning...
  • Page 954 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Change the unlock PIN. Configure the IP phone to automatically lock the phone after a time interval. Assign a phone lock key. Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default phone_setting.phone_lock.enable 0 or 1 Description:...
  • Page 955 Configuring Security Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the password for unlocking the phone. Web User Interface: Features->Phone Lock->Phone Unlock PIN(0~15 Digit) Phone User Interface: Menu->Basic->Change PIN phone_setting.phone_lock.lock_time_out Integer from 0 to 3600 Description: Configures the maximum time (in seconds) the IP phone can be idle before it is automatically locked.
  • Page 956 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Features->Phone Lock->Emergency Phone User Interface: None Phone Lock Type The following table lists the operation behavior when configuring the type of phone lock: All Keys Function Keys Menu key Allow Behavior: You are allowed to press the desired Line Key (key type is Line) or...

  • Page 957: Phone Lock Key

    Configuring Security Features All Keys Function Keys Menu key Allow Behavior: You are allowed to press the Line Key (key type is Line), input or modify numbers, dial emergency numbers and return to idle screen. Keys not Locked: IME, More, Cancel, Send, Delete and Line soft key;...
  • Page 958 The digit 50 stands for the key type Phone Lock. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 959 Parameters Permitted Values Default For SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G IP phones: The default value of the line key 1-16 is 15, and the default value of the line key 17-27 is 0. For SIP-T52S IP phones: The default value of the line key 1-12 is 15, and the default value of the line key 13-21 is 0.
  • Page 960 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default When X=8, the default value is 52 (Switch Account Down). When X=9, the default value is 33 (Status). When X=10, the default value is 0 (NA). When X=13, the default value is 0 (NA).
  • Page 961 (Optional.) Configures the label displayed on the LCD screen for each DSS key. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 962 Permitted Values Default X ranges from 1 to 4. For ext keys: For SIP-T54S/T52S: X ranges from 1 to 3, Y ranges from 1 to 60. For SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S: X ranges from 1 to 6, Y ranges from 1 to 40.
  • Page 963 Configuring Security Features Enter the desired time in the Phone Lock Time Out(0~3600s) field. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure a phone lock key via web user interface: Click on Dsskey->Line Key (or Programable Key). In the desired DSS key field, select Phone Lock from the pull-down list of Type. (Optional.) Enter the string that will appear on the LCD screen in the Label field.

  • Page 964: Transport Layer Security (Tls)

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Press the Save soft key to accept the change. To configure a phone lock key via phone user interface: Press Menu->Features->DSS Keys. Select the desired DSS key. Press , or the Switch soft key to select Key Event from the Type field. Press , or the Switch soft key to select Phone Lock from the Key Type field.
  • Page 965 Configuring Security Features DES-CBC3-SHA  DES-CBC3-MD5  DHE-RSA-AES128-SHA  DHE-DSS-AES128-SHA  AES128-SHA  RC2-CBC-MD5  IDEA-CBC-SHA  DHE-DSS-RC4-SHA  RC4-SHA  RC4-MD5  RC4-64-MD5  EXP1024-DHE-DSS-DES-CBC-SHA  EXP1024-DES-CBC-SHA  EDH-RSA-DES-CBC-SHA  EDH-DSS-DES-CBC-SHA  DES-CBC-SHA  DES-CBC-MD5  EXP1024-DHE-DSS-RC4-SHA  EXP1024-RC4-SHA ...
  • Page 966 A unique server certificate: It is unique to an IP phone (based on the MAC address) and issued by the Yealink Certificate Authority (CA). A generic server certificate: It issued by the Yealink Certificate Authority (CA). Only if no unique certificate exists, the IP phone may send a generic certificate for authentication.
  • Page 967 Configuring Security Features Procedure Configuration changes can be performed using the following methods. Configure TLS on a per-line basis. <MAC>.cfg Parameter: account.X.sip_server.Y.transport_type Configure the TLS version. Parameter: static.security.default_ssl_method Configure trusted certificates feature. Parameters: static.security.trust_certificates static.security.ca_cert static.security.cn_validation Configure server certificates feature. Parameter: Central static.security.dev_cert...
  • Page 968 0-UDP 1-TCP 2-TLS 3-DNS-NAPTR X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2)
  • Page 969 Configuring Security Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the TLS version the IP phone uses to negotiate with the provisioning server when using TLS transport method to download the boot file and configuration files from the provisioning server. 0-use TLS 1.0 to negotiate with the provisioning server 3-use TLS 1.2 to negotiate with the provisioning server, and it is backward compatible 4-use TLS 1.1 to negotiate with the provisioning server 5-use TLS 1.2 to negotiate with the provisioning server...
  • Page 970 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default 0-Default Certificates 1-Custom Certificates 2-All Certificates Note: If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect. Web User Interface: Security->Trusted Certificates->CA Certificates Phone User Interface: None...
  • Page 971 Configuring Security Features Parameters Permitted Values Default None URL within 511 static.trusted_certificates.url Blank characters Description: Configures the access URL of the custom trusted certificate used to authenticate the connecting server. Example: static.trusted_certificates.url = http://192.168.1.20/tc.crt Note: The certificate you want to upload must be in *.pem, *.crt, *.cer or *.der format. Web User Interface: Security->Trusted Certificates->Load Trusted Certificates File Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 972 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: None static.server_certificates.delete http://localhost/all Blank Description: Deletes all uploaded server certificates. Example: static.server_certificates.delete = http://localhost/all Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None static.phone_setting.reserve_certs_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to reserve custom certificates after it is reset to factory...
  • Page 973 Configuring Security Features Select TLS from the pull-down list of Transport. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure the trusted certificates via web user interface: Click on Security->Trusted Certificates. Select the desired values from the pull-down lists of Only Accept Trusted Certificates, Common Name Validation and CA Certificates.
  • Page 974 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Click Browse to select the certificate (*.pem, *.crt, *.cer or *.der) from your local system. Click Upload to upload the certificate. To configure the server certificates via web user interface: Click on Security->Server Certificates.

  • Page 975: Secure Real-Time Transport Protocol (Srtp)

    Configuring Security Features Click Browse to select the certificate (*.pem and *.cer) from your local system. Click Upload to upload the certificate. Secure Real-Time Transport Protocol (SRTP) Secure Real-Time Transport Protocol (SRTP) encrypts the RTP during VoIP phone calls to avoid interception and eavesdropping.
  • Page 976 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Example of the RTP encryption algorithm carried in the SDP of the 200 OK message: m=audio 11780 RTP/SAVP 0 101 a=rtpmap:0 PCMU/8000 a=rtpmap:101 telephone-event/8000 a=crypto:1 AES_CM_128_HMAC_SHA1_80 inline:NGY4OGViMDYzZjQzYTNiOTNkOWRiYzRlMjM0Yzcz a=sendrecv a=ptime:20 a=fmtp:101 0-15 SRTP is configurable on a per-line basis.
  • Page 977 If it is set to 2 (Compulsory), the IP phone is forced to use SRTP during a call. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S)

  • Page 978: Encrypting And Decrypting Files

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Encrypting and Decrypting Files Yealink IP phones support downloading encrypted files from the server and encrypting files before/when uploading them to the server. You can encrypt the following files: Configuration files: MAC-Oriented CFG file (<MAC>.cfg), Common CFG file ...
  • Page 979 Configuring Security Features http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=settings- autop&q=load Configure AES keys. Phone User Interface Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default static.auto_provision.update_file_mode 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone only to download the encrypted files. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled If it is set to 0 (Disabled), the IP phone will download the configuration files (e.g., sip.cfg, account.cfg, <MAC>-local.cfg) and <MAC>-contact.xml file from the server during auto provisioning no matter whether the files are encrypted or not.
  • Page 980 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default corresponding key (e.g., key2, key3). Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None static.auto_provision.aes_key_16.com 16 characters Blank Description: Configures the plaintext AES key for encrypting/decrypting the Common CFG/Custom CFG file.
  • Page 981 Configuring Security Features Parameters Permitted Values Default configured by the parameter “static.auto_provision.aes_key_16.com”. Web User Interface: Settings->Auto Provision->MAC-Oriented AES Key Phone User Interface: Menu->Advanced (default password: admin) ->Auto Provision->MAC-Oriented AES static.auto_provision.encryption.directory 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to encrypt <MAC>-contact.xml file using the plaintext AES key.

  • Page 982: Encrypting And Decrypting Configuration Files

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default the one (encrypted or unencrypted) stored on the server if you have configured to back up the MAC-local CFG file to the server by the parameter “static.auto_provision.custom.sync”. The plaintext AES key is configured by the parameter “static.auto_provision.aes_key_16.mac”.
  • Page 983 Aeskey.txt to store the plaintext 16-character symmetric keys for each configuration file. For a Microsoft Windows platform, you can use a Yealink-supplied encryption tool “Config_Encrypt_Tool.exe” to encrypt the configuration files respectively. Yealink also supplies a configuration encryption tool (yealinkencrypt) for Linux platform if...

  • Page 984: Procedure To Encrypt Configuration Files

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Procedure to Encrypt Configuration Files To encrypt the account.cfg file: Double click “Config_Encrypt_Tool.exe” to start the application tool. The screenshot of the main page is shown as below: When you start the application tool, a file folder named “Encrypted” is created automatically in the directory where the application tool is located.

  • Page 985: Encrypting And Decrypting Contact Files

    Configuring Security Features Click OK. The target directory will be automatically opened. You can find the encrypted CFG file(s), encrypted key file(s) and an Aeskey.txt file storing plaintext AES key(s). Encrypting and Decrypting Contact Files Encrypted contact files can be used to protect against unauthorized access and tampering of private information (e.g., contact number).

  • Page 986: Incoming Signaling Validation

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Incoming Signaling Validation Yealink IP phones support the following three optional levels of security for validating incoming network signaling: Source IP address validation: ensure request is received from an IP address of a server ...
  • Page 987 Configuring Security Features Details of the Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default sip.request_validation.source.list A valid string Blank Description: Configures the string used for source IP address validation. It is used to ensure the request is received from the IP address of a SIP server. Example: sip.request_validation.source.list = INVITE, NOTIYF Web User Interface:...
  • Page 988 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default sip.request_validation.digest.event A valid string Blank Description: Configures which events specified within the Event header of SUBSCRIBE or NOTIFY request should be validated when performing the digest authentication. If it is left blank, all events will be validated.

  • Page 989: Troubleshooting

    Troubleshooting Troubleshooting This chapter provides an administrator with general information for troubleshooting some common problems that he (or she) may encounter while using IP phones. Troubleshooting Methods IP phones can provide feedback in a variety of forms such as log files, packets, status indicators and so on, which can help an administrator more easily find the system problem and fix it.
  • Page 990 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Local Logging Procedure Local logging can be configured using the following methods. Configure local logging feature. Parameter: static.local_log.enable Configure the severity level of the logs to be reported to the <MAC>-sys.log file. Parameter: static.local_log.level Configure the maximum size of the log...
  • Page 991 Troubleshooting Parameter: static.auto_provision.local_log.backup.appe Configure the waiting time before the phone uploads the <MAC>-boot.log file to the server after bootup. Parameter: static.auto_provision.local_log.backup.bootl og.upload_wait_time Configure the upload path of the local log files. Parameter: static.auto_provision.local_log.backup.path Configure local logging feature. Configure the severity level of the logs to be reported to the <MAC>-sys.log file.
  • Page 992 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Permitte Defa Parameters d Values Web User Interface: Settings->Configuration->Enable Local Log Phone User Interface: None Integer static.local_log.level from 0 to 6 Description: Configures the lowest level of local log information to be reported to the <MAC>-sys.log file.
  • Page 993 Troubleshooting Permitte Defa Parameters d Values (2) If the value of the parameter “static.auto_provision.local_log.backup.enable” is set to 0 (Disabled), the IP phone will erase half of the logs from the oldest log information on the phone. Permitted Values: Integer from 1024 to 2048 (for T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S/T29G/T27P/T27G/CP860/CP920) Integer from 256 to 1024 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2) Example:...
  • Page 994 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Permitte Defa Parameters d Values Description: Configures the period (in seconds) of the local log files (<MAC>-boot.log and <MAC>- sys.log) uploads to the provisioning server or a specific server. Example: static.auto_provision.local_log.backup.upload_period = 60 Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “static.auto_provision.local_log.backup.enable”...
  • Page 995 Troubleshooting Permitte Defa Parameters d Values Configures whether the local log files (<MAC>-boot.log and <MAC>-sys.log) on the provisioning server or a specific server are overwritten or appended. 0-Overwrite 1-Append (not applicable to TFTP Server) Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None static.auto_provision.local_log.backup.append.limit_mode 0 or 1...
  • Page 996 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones Permitte Defa Parameters d Values Integer from 1 to static.auto_provision.local_log.backup.bootlog.upload_wait_time 86400 Description: Configures the waiting time (in seconds) before the phone uploads the <MAC>-boot.log file to the provisioning server or a specific server after startup. Example: static.auto_provision.local_log.backup.bootlog.upload_wait_time = 121 Web User Interface:...
  • Page 997 Troubleshooting system. To export the boot log to a local PC via web user interface: Click on Settings->Configuration. Select Enabled from the pull-down list of Enable Local Log. Select boot.log from the pull-down list of Export Local Log. Click Confirm to accept the change. Click Export to open the file download window, and then save the file to your local system.
  • Page 998 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series/CP860/CP920 IP Phones sys.log file to 4, then the log with a severity level of 0 to 4 will all be reported. You can verify whether you got the correct log through the following key fields: <0+emerg>...
  • Page 999 Troubleshooting static.syslog.facility Configure the IP phone to prepend the MAC address to the log messages exported to the syslog server. Parameter: static.syslog.prepend_mac_address.enable Configure syslog feature. Configure syslog server. Configure the transport protocol that the IP phone uses to export log to the syslog server.
  • Page 1000 If it is set to 0, an example of the syslog message: Log [2928]: BSUI <6+info > FlickGestureRec If it is set to 1, an example of the syslog message: <134>YEALINK-T46G [00:10:99:09:F6:16] [28.81.0.40] Jun 17 00:00:13 Log [2928]: BSUI <6+info > FlickGestureRec Note: If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect.
  • Page 1001 Troubleshooting Permitted Defa Parameters Values Phone User Interface: None static.syslog.transport_type 0, 1 or 2 Description: Configures the transport protocol that the IP phone uses when exporting log messages to the syslog server. 0-UDP 1-TCP 2-TLS Web User Interface: Settings->Configuration->Syslog Transport Type Phone User Interface: None Integer...

This manual is also suitable for:

Sip-t52sSip-t42g/sSip-t41p/sSipt40p/gSip-t29gSip-t27p/g ... Show all
Save PDF